JP6917624B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Most pachinko machines have a high probability of one type (for example, 1/30) and a low probability of one type (for example, 1/300) for a big hit. Some of them have 6 levels of setting values, have different jackpot probabilities for each stage, and can set any of the 6 levels of setting values. With such a configuration, even the same pachinko gaming machine can play games under different jackpot probabilities, so that a variety of games can be realized.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-085674

However, there is no suggestion to the player playing the game what the set value is set for the pachinko machine, so there is room for improvement in further improving the motivation for playing. there were.

An object of the present invention is to improve the motivation to play in view of such a situation.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is based on a game ball entering a ball entry area formed in a game area where the game ball can flow down and a game ball entering the starting area of the ball entry area. A determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a variation display of the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting area are started, and as the variation time elapses, the variation display is started. To set one of the setting values from the symbol variation game executing means for stopping the variation display and executing the symbol variation game for deriving the result of the determination, and the setting values of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage in the determination. The setting operation means and the suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the information related to the set value set by the setting operation means are provided, and the special ball in the ball entry area in the special game state is provided. The area is controlled to open and close over a plurality of round games, and when the open / close control over the plurality of round games is completed, the end state in the special game state is controlled, and the special game state is the first number of times as the plurality of round games. Includes a first special gaming state in which the special entry area is opened and closed, and a second special gaming state in which the special entry area is opened and closed for a second number of times less than the first number of times as the plurality of round games. The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect based on the game ball entering the starting area, and the suggestion effect is performed when the symbol variation game based on the entry ball is being performed. It is capable of executing an effect, when the symbol variation game executed by said determination for shifting to the first special game state results is derived, and the pre-migration SL to a first special game state, the first special game state while the Ru executable der specific suggestion effect of the suggested effect in the end state in, the result of the determination for shifting the execution of the symbol variation game to the second special game state is derived, the It shifts to the second special gaming state, and the specific suggestion effect cannot be executed in the end state in the second special gaming state, and is executed when the symbol variation game based on the ball entry is being performed. The specific suggestive effect executed in the end state in the first special game state is related to a specific set value which is a set value of any one of the plurality of stages of the set value than the suggested effect. It is characterized by a high rate of suggesting information.

(2) The gaming machine according to the present invention is based on a game ball entering a ball entry area formed in a game area where the game ball can flow down and a game ball entering the starting area of the ball entry area. A determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a variation display of the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting area are started, and as the variation time elapses, the variation display is started. To set one of the setting values from the symbol variation game executing means for stopping the variation display and executing the symbol variation game for deriving the result of the determination, and the setting values of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage in the determination. The special gaming state includes a setting operation means, a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting information related to a set value set by the set operation means, and an operation means that can be operated by a player. The first special game state in which the special entry area of the entry area is opened and closed is controlled over the first number of times as a plurality of round games, and the second number of times less than the first number of times as the plurality of round games. The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect based on the game ball entering the start area, including a second special game state in which the special entry area is controlled to open and close. The result of the determination that the suggestion effect using the operation means can be executed when the symbol variation game based on the entry of a ball is being performed, and the transition to the first special gaming state is performed by executing the symbol variation game. When There are derived, one at the transition to said first special game state Ru executable der the suggestion effect using the operation means, the determination for shifting to the second special game state by the execution of the symbol variation game When the result of in that any one of the setting values of the setting value of the found the following are performed using the operation means the suggested effect in the first special game state than the suggested effect using the operation means and said plurality of stages It is characterized in that the ratio of suggesting information related to a specific set value is high.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the motivation to play.

It is an external front view of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an external rear view of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special symbol hit determination table and the ordinary symbol hit determination table which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special symbol determination table and the ordinary symbol determination table which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation pattern table which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control board main processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control board timer interrupt process which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the input SW detection process which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the start of a special symbol change which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit game processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control board main processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control board timer interrupt process which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the special symbol variation pattern which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention, and whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect symbol variation pattern table which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the effect symbol variation pattern and execution notice which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the advance notice effect and setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the setting suggestion effect-related determination table which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows each game state-specific processing (1/3 in non-variable short) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows each game state-specific process (2/3 in non-variable short) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows each game state-specific processing (3/3 in non-variable short) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an animation which shows whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the non-variable short-term (during changing) which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. This is an animation showing whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed during the non-variable short-term (when the fluctuation is stopped) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is an animation showing whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed during the non-variable short-term (at the start of fluctuation) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the non-variable short-term (demo screen transition) which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an animation which shows whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the non-variable short-term (notice of effect button) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows each game state-specific processing (1/3 in variation) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows each game state-specific process (2/3 in variation) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows each game state-specific processing (3/3 in variation) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. This is an animation showing whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed during the variation (during variation) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is an animation showing whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed during the variation (at the time of transition from the winning game) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows each game state-specific processing (1/3 in a game) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows each game state-specific process (2/3 in a game) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows each game state-based processing (3/3 in a game) which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. This is an animation showing whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed during the hit game according to the first embodiment of the present invention (when the game shifts to the hit game within a predetermined period). This is an animation showing whether or not a setting suggestion effect is executed during a hit game (during a round game) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is an animation showing whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed during the hit game (during the interval between rounds) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is an animation showing whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed during the hit game (during the ending) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is an animation showing the execution of a setting suggestion effect during a hit game (mini game during a round game) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is an animation showing whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed during the hit game (5000 shots not reached / reached) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the setting suggestion effect execution processing performed in the payout control board timer interrupt processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an animation which shows the setting suggestion effect by the control of the payout control board which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special symbol hit detection table which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special symbol determination table which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit game processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the number of times of a high probability state for every set value which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention, the number of times of a change-shortening state, and the common effect during change-shortening. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the number of times of a high probability state for every set value which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention, the number of times of a change | change state, and a concealment effect. This is an animation showing a common effect during variation and shortness according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is an animation which shows the concealment effect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an animation which shows whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the ending at the end of the variation state which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. This is an animation showing whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed at the ending at the end of the concealment effect according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control board main processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value information command reception processing in the main command reception processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each indicator in the presence / absence of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode (another example) of each indicator in the presence / absence of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention. In the following description, "front", "rear", "left", "right", "top", and "bottom" refer to the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 as viewed from the player side. Pointing.

(External configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 for installation on a gaming machine installation island (not shown) of a game store and the outer frame 2, and the gaming board 6 shown in FIG. A glass frame 4 that is pivotally supported by the middle frame 3 and faces the front side of the game board 6 so that the game board 6 can be seen through transparent glass, and a middle frame 3 It is pivotally supported by the glass frame 4, is located below the glass frame 4, and has a saucer member 5 capable of storing a game ball. The glass frame 4 and the saucer member 5 may be formed of a separate type or an integrated type.

Further, the middle frame 3 is provided with a launching device (not shown) for launching the game ball into the game area 7 of the game board 6, and a launching handle 8 for causing the launching device to perform a launching operation. Is provided. The launch handle 8 is gripped by the player and can be rotated within a predetermined range, and the firing intensity when launching the game ball into the game area 7 can be adjusted by the amount of rotation. It has become. For example, when the ball is rotated by the first momentum (when the first firing intensity is obtained), the game ball is fired on the left side of the game area 7 (so-called “left-handed” is possible), and the first When the ball is rotated with a second rotation amount larger than the rotation amount of (the second firing intensity), the game ball is launched on the right side of the game area 7 (so-called "right-handed strike"). Is possible).

Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with a light emitting device 9 (lamp, LED, etc.) so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be decorated by light emission. For example, in the "special symbol hit determination process" (see FIG. 12) described later, it is possible to execute an effect of notifying the hit by emitting light in rainbow colors based on the determination of the hit. .. Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with a speaker 10 so that voice and sound effects can be output. For example, when the "normal game state" described later is controlled, the music corresponding to the "normal game state" can be output, and when the "probability change game state" described later is controlled, the "probability change game state" is controlled. Music according to the "state" can be output.

Further, the saucer member 5 is composed of an upper saucer 5a and a lower saucer 5b, and when the stored amount of the game balls in the upper saucer 5a exceeds a certain amount, the game balls are paid out to the lower saucer 5b. It has become. Further, the saucer member 5 has a ball removal button 11 for discharging the game ball stored in the upper saucer 5a to the lower saucer 5b at the end of the game, and a game ball for a game ball lending device (not shown). The ball lending button 12 for requesting the withdrawal of the ball, the card return button 13 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device, and the balance display unit 12a for displaying the balance of the valuable value medium. Also, a ball lending lamp 12b is provided to notify that the ball lending is possible by operating the ball lending button 12.

Further, the saucer member 5 is provided with an effect button 14 and an effect lever 15 that can be operated by the player when an operation promotion effect is executed. Further, the saucer member 5 can be operated by the player, and the volume of the sound and sound effect output from the speaker 10 can be adjusted, the amount of light emitted from the light emitting device 9 can be adjusted, and the image display device 26 described later can be used. A cross key button 16 is provided for adjusting the amount of emitted light. The effect button 14 and the effect lever 15 may be provided independently or integrally.

Here, examples of the operation promotion effect include a “pre-reach effect” performed before the “reach” described later and a “post-reach effect” performed after the “reach”. As a basic distribution of the effect, the effect button 14 may be operable in both the "pre-reach effect" and the "post-reach effect", and the effect lever 15 is operated in the "post-reach effect". It may be possible. It should be noted that the distribution of the production may be any. For example, the effect lever 15 may be operable as a “pre-reach effect”. Further, the effect button 14 may be provided with a vibrating device, or the effect lever 15 may be provided with a vibrating device. The vibrating device may be vibrated, for example, when the decorative symbol described later is temporarily stopped and displayed at "777" or the like, or may be vibrated during the above-mentioned "pre-reach effect" or "post-reach effect". Often, when it is determined to be a hit in the "special symbol hit determination process", it may be easily vibrated. Further, the effect button 14 may be continuously pressed, so-called "continuous hitting effect", or may be continuously pressed for a predetermined time, so-called "long-pressed effect".

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various control boards such as a main control board 100, an effect control board 200, a payout control board 300 and a payout device 304, and a power supply board 400, which will be described later, are provided (accurately). These various control boards are attached to the back surface of the middle frame 3). Further, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a setting changing device 31 described later is provided. The setting change device 31 has a setting change keyhole 31a for inserting a setting change key (not shown) managed by a clerk of a game store, and a setting change button 31b for sequentially switching a setting value of a plurality of stages described later. A setting confirmation button 31c for confirming the set value to be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a setting display unit 31d for displaying the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. When the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31a and rotated by 90 degrees, the set value can be changed. In that state, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, and when changing the setting value from there, press the setting change button 31b to display the setting display unit. When the setting value displayed on 31d is switched and displayed and the setting value to be set is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, the setting confirmation button 31c is pressed and the setting change key is rotated 90 degrees from the position. When it is rotated to the original position and pulled out, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is fixed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without inserting the setting change key into the setting change keyhole 31a, or when the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31a (not rotated 90 degrees), the power is turned on. When it is turned on, the set value cannot be changed. In this case, the currently set value (setting value stored in the main RAM 103) is inherited.

The method for changing the set value is not limited to such a method, and other methods may be used. For example, the set value may be confirmed by rotating the setting change key from the position rotated by 90 degrees to the original position and pulling it out without providing the setting confirmation button 31c, or by pressing the setting change key. The set value may be set according to the rotation position so that the rotation can be performed in a plurality of stages. For example, when it is rotated 45 degrees, the set value becomes "1", when it is rotated 90 degrees, the set value becomes "2", and when it is rotated 135 degrees, the set value becomes "3". You may (in this case, the setting change key is always inserted). Further, the setting changing device 31 may be provided at any place as long as it is on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. For example, it may be provided on the main control board 100. Further, the set value may be displayed on another display unit without providing the setting display unit 31d. For example, the set value may be displayed on the "first special symbol display 27a" or the "second special symbol display 27b" of the symbol display device 27 described later. Further, the set value may be displayed on the image display device 26. With this configuration, the number of parts can be reduced.

Further, changing the set value includes not only changing the current set value to a different set value, but also changing the current set value to the same set value. For example, in the former case, when the current set value is "1", it corresponds to changing to any of the set value "2" to the set value "4", and in the latter case, the current set value is "1". If, it corresponds to changing to the set value "1".

(Structure of game board 6)
As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 6 is made of a veneer material or a synthetic resin material, and an image display device 26 is detachably assembled on the back surface side. Further, the game board 6 is formed with a game area 7 in which the game ball can roll, and the outer rail member 18 and the inner rail for guiding the game ball launched from the launching device to the game area 7. The member 19 is formed. Further, in the game area 7, a gate member 20 through which the game ball can pass, a first starting port 21 through which the game ball can enter, and a stage 17 for facilitating entry into the first starting port 21. The second starting opening 22 where the game ball can enter, the normal winning opening 23 where the game ball can enter, and the "special symbol hit determination process" determine that the hit game is executed. A large winning opening 24 into which a game ball can enter, an out opening 25 for discharging the game ball outside the game area (game ball discharge gutter), a movable body 28 that can move in the vertical direction, and others shown in the figure. No game nails, windmills, etc. are provided. A game that is determined to be a hit by the "special symbol hit determination process" and the large winning opening 24 is opened a predetermined number of times is referred to as a "hit game".

(About gate member 20)
The gate member 20 is provided in the right central portion of the game area 7, and allows the game ball to pass when a so-called "right-handed" is performed in which the game ball is launched on the right side of the game area 7. It has become. In addition, it is always open upward, allowing the game ball to pass through at all times. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20, the "passing gate detection processing" described later is performed, and whether or not the protruding member (not shown) provided at the second starting port 22 is projected. The "ordinary symbol hit determination process" is performed, and after the ordinary symbol variation time described later elapses, the "ordinary symbol hit determination process" is executed to derive the determination result of the "ordinary symbol hit determination process". If the game ball passes through the gate member 20 while the "ordinary symbol variation game" based on the passage to the gate member 20 is being performed, the execution of the "ordinary symbol variation game" based on the passage is suspended. With the exception of the "normal symbol fluctuation game" that is being executed, up to "4" can be held. Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a reserved storage area for the "ordinary symbol variation game", and the reserved storage area is the "relevant storage area" corresponding to the currently fluctuating "ordinary symbol variation game". The "first storage area" corresponding to the "ordinary symbol variation game" performed after the currently fluctuating "ordinary symbol variation game" is completed, and thereafter, the "second storage area" and the "third memory". It is composed of an "area" and a "fourth storage area", and when the currently fluctuating "ordinary symbol fluctuation game" finishes fluctuating, it is stored in the "relevant storage area" and in the "first storage area". The judgment information (random value) is transferred, the judgment information (random value) stored in the "second storage area" is transferred to the "first storage area", and the "third" is transferred to the "second storage area". The judgment information (random value) stored in the "storage area" is transferred, the judgment information (random value) stored in the "fourth storage area" is transferred to the "third storage area", and the "fourth storage area" is transferred. Is vacant. Although the "ordinary symbol hit detection process" is not mentioned in the flowchart described later, it is a process performed in the "ordinary symbol-related process" in step S104 of FIG. 9, and is the ordinary process of FIG. 5 (B) described later. With reference to the symbol hit determination table, it is determined whether the normal symbol is "hit" or "missing". Further, although the gate member 20 is a member through which the game ball can pass, the gate member 20 may be a gate member 20 through which the game ball can enter by using the ball entry port.

(About the first starting port 21)
The first starting port 21 is provided in the central portion of the game area 7, and the game ball enters the ball when a so-called “left-handed” is performed in which the game ball is launched on the left side of the game area 7. It is possible. In addition, it is always open upward, allowing the entry of game balls at all times. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21, for example, the game ball of "3" ball is paid out as a prize ball, and in addition to the prize ball, "special symbol collision detection processing" is performed, and the special symbol described later is performed. The "design" that displays the symbol, the decorative symbol image, and the fourth symbol image in a variable manner, and derives (confirms display) the judgment result (special symbol and decorative symbol) of the "special symbol hit detection process" after the variable time described later elapses. "Fluctuating game" is executed. If a game ball enters the first starting port 21 while a "design variation game" based on the entry into the first starting port 21 is being performed, a "design variation game" based on the entry into the first starting port 21 is performed. The execution of is suspended, and up to "4" can be suspended except for the "design variation game" being executed. Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a hold storage area for the "design variation game" corresponding to the first start port 21, and the hold storage area corresponds to the currently changing "symbol variation game". The "corresponding storage area", the "first storage area" corresponding to the "design variation game" performed after the currently fluctuating "symbol variation game" is completed, and thereafter, the "second storage area". It is composed of a "third storage area" and a "fourth storage area". The judgment information (random value) stored in the "second storage area" is transferred to the "first storage area", and the judgment information (random value) stored in the "second storage area" is transferred to the "second storage area". The judgment information (random value) stored in the "third storage area" is transferred, the judgment information (random value) stored in the "fourth storage area" is transferred to the "third storage area", and the "third storage area" is transferred. "4 Storage area" becomes empty.

(About the second starting port 22)
The second starting port 22 is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 7, and the game ball enters when a so-called "right-handed" is performed in which the game ball is launched on the right side of the game area 7. The ball is possible. Further, unlike the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22 is not always open upward, and in principle, the game ball is not allowed to enter (it is in the "closed" state). That is, the second starting port 22 has a projecting member (not shown) that can project to the front side, and only when the projecting member projects to the front side (when it is in the "open" state), the game is played. It is possible to enter the ball. Regarding whether or not to allow the game ball to enter by projecting the protruding member to the front side, when it is determined to be a hit by the above-mentioned "ordinary symbol hit determination process", FIG. 6 (B) described later. It is possible to open and close in the opening and closing mode shown in "Opening and closing mode of the second starting port". Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port 22, for example, the game ball of the "2" ball is paid out as a prize ball, and in addition to the prize ball, the above-mentioned "design variation game" is executed. If a game ball enters the second starting port 22 while a "design variation game" based on the entry into the second starting port 22 is being performed, a "design variation game" based on the entry into the second starting opening 22 is performed. The execution of is suspended, and up to "4" can be suspended except for the "design variation game" being executed. Specifically, the main RAM 103 is provided with a hold storage area for the "design variation game" corresponding to the second start port 22, and the hold storage area corresponds to the currently changing "symbol variation game". The "corresponding storage area", the "first storage area" corresponding to the "design variation game" performed after the currently fluctuating "symbol variation game" is completed, and thereafter, the "second storage area". It is composed of a "third storage area" and a "fourth storage area". The stored determination information (random value) is transferred, the determination information (random value) stored in the "second storage area" is transferred to the "first storage area", and the "second storage area" is ". The judgment information (random value) stored in the "third storage area" is transferred, the judgment information (random value) stored in the "fourth storage area" is transferred to the "third storage area", and the "fourth storage area" is transferred. The "storage area" becomes empty. In the present embodiment, as the second starting port 22, a protruding member that is movable in the front-rear direction is used, but a so-called "electric tulip" having a movable wing piece may be used.

Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball enters the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22, and the "special symbol hit determination process" is performed to obtain the special symbol, the decorative symbol image, and the fourth symbol image. A series of flow such as displaying the fluctuation and deriving (confirming display) the judgment result (special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image) of the "special symbol hit detection process" after the fluctuation time has elapsed is described as "symbol variation". It may be referred to as a "game" or simply as a "one-variable game".

When the game ball of "1" enters the first starting port 21, the game ball of "1" enters in the "first special symbol display 27a" and the "image display device 26". When the "design variation game" based on the ball is executed and the game ball of "1" enters the second starting port 22, the "second special symbol display 27b" and the "image display device 26" are used. In, a "design variation game" based on the entry of the game ball of "1" is executed. Therefore, the "symbol variation game" is a general term for games played by the "first special symbol display 27a" and the "image display device 26", and the "second special symbol display 27b" and " Image display device 26 ", which refers to a general term for games played in.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the determination result (special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image) of the "special symbol hit determination process" is derived after the variation time in the "symbol variation game" has elapsed. It is referred to as "confirmed display" of the special symbol, the decorative symbol image, and the fourth symbol image). On the other hand, in the "design variation game", temporarily stopping the decorative symbol image before the variation time elapses is referred to as "temporary stop display" of the decorative symbol image. Examples of the "temporary stop display" include the "reach" described later and the "sway fluctuation display" before the "confirmed display". The "sway fluctuation display" before the "confirmation display" means that the decorative design image is "temporarily stopped display" at, for example, "767" and then "confirmed display" at "767", or once "767". This is a variable display that is performed at the branching point of either "temporary stop display" of the loss display, and "777" is "confirmed display" after the reverse effect is performed to derive "777". ..

(About ordinary winning opening 23)
The normal winning openings 23 are provided with a total of "4", "3" in the lower left of the game area 7 and "1" in the lower right, and the "3" ordinary winning openings 23 in the lower left are provided. , When the so-called "left-handed" is performed, the game ball can be entered, and the "1" ordinary winning openings 23 at the lower right are the so-called "right-handed". In addition, game balls can be entered. Further, the ordinary winning opening 23 is always open upward like the first starting opening 21, and is always allowed to enter the game ball. Then, when a game ball enters the normal winning opening 23, for example, the game ball of "8" balls is paid out as a prize ball. The arrangement position of the ordinary winning openings 23 can be arbitrarily changed, and the number may be less than "4".

(About the big prize opening 24)
The large winning opening 24 is provided below the first starting opening 21, and a game ball can be entered when a so-called "right-handed hit" is performed. In addition, the large winning opening 24 has an opening / closing door, and when it is determined to be a hit in the "special symbol hit determination process", a hit game is executed, the opening / closing door is tilted to the front side, and the game ball. Allows the ball to enter. Then, when the game ball enters the large winning opening 24, for example, the game ball of "10" balls is paid out as a prize ball. Here, in the winning game, the opening / closing door of the large winning opening 24 is opened (tilted to the front side) for the number of granted rounds shown in FIG. Then, per round, it is opened over 29.5S (tilts forward), and if 10 game balls are detected by the large winning opening detection SW24a described later before 29.5S elapses, 29.5S elapses. Even before, the open / close door is closed, the next round is advanced, and this is repeated for the specified number of rounds. On the other hand, if 29.5S elapses (so-called "attacker full open") before the entry of 10 game balls is detected by the large winning opening detection SW24a, the opening / closing door is closed and the next round is advanced. become. In this case, one round game ends without reaching the specified number of balls entered per round of 10, which is disadvantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door that tilts to the front side is used as the large winning opening 24, but a so-called "electric tulip" may be used, or a "shutter member" that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction may be used. good. Further, in the present embodiment, the board surface configuration is such that "1" large winning openings 24 are arranged, but a board surface configuration in which "2" pieces are arranged may be used.

(About the image display device 26)
The image display device 26 is provided so as to be located above the stage 17, and is capable of displaying the above-mentioned "design variation game" and the effect image. That is, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 and the "special symbol hit determination process" is performed, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, The right decorative symbol image 26c is fluctuated (vertically scrolled) in the fluctuating display area. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting port 21 or the game ball enters the second starting port 22, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decoration are common. The symbol image 26c is fluctuated (vertically scrolled) in the variable display area (although the special symbol display is different, the decorative symbol image used in the image display device 26 is common). Then, the effect image is displayed within the fluctuation time described later, and when the fluctuation time elapses, if it is a hit, for example, "7" is stopped in each decorative symbol image, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "777" is combined. By displaying the confirmation, it is notified that it is a hit. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, for example, the combination of the decorative symbols of "765" is confirmed and displayed to notify that the loss occurs. Further, separately from each decorative symbol image, the fourth symbol image 26d (the above-mentioned "fourth" symbol following the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c) is displayed on the right side of the display area. It can be displayed at the bottom, and variable display and final display are possible in synchronization with each decorative pattern image. Further, the image display device 26 displays the number of holds of the "design variation game" in the first start port 21 from "0" to "4", the first start port hold number image 26e, and the second start port 22. The number of holds of the "design variation game" is displayed by "0" to "4" in the second start port hold number image 26f, and the number of holds of the "design change game" in the first start port 21 is displayed in the hold ball image. 1st starting port 1st holding ball image display area 26g, 1st starting port 2nd holding ball image display area 26h, 1st starting port 3rd holding ball image display area 26i, 1st starting port 4th holding ball image 26 display area j and 2nd start port 1st hold ball image display area 26k, 2nd start port 2nd hold ball image for displaying the number of holds of the "design variation game" in the 2nd start port 22 as a hold ball image The display area 26l, the second starting port third holding ball image display area 26m, and the second starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26n can be displayed. Here, the number of holds displayed in the first start port hold number image 26e and the hold displayed in the first start port first hold ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth hold ball image display area 26j. The number is always synchronized with the number of holds displayed in the second start port hold number image 26f and in the second start port first hold ball image display area 26k to the second start port fourth hold ball image display area 26n. Be sure to synchronize with the number of holds displayed. For example, when displaying "4" in the first starting port reserved number image 26e, "4" pieces are displayed in the first starting port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26j. The hold ball image of is displayed.

Here, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d can display the symbol images from "1" to "8", and are "special symbols". If the judgment result of the "hit judgment process" is a hit, any of the symbols "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", "666", "777", and "888" It is possible to display the combination of. On the other hand, when the determination result of the "special symbol hit determination process" is a loss, it is possible to display a combination of symbols other than the above combination of symbols. In the case of loss, when a special symbol variation pattern with "reach" is determined in the special symbol variation pattern described later, for example, a combination of symbols such as "767" is confirmed and displayed, and a special without "reach" is displayed. When the symbol variation pattern is determined, for example, a combination of symbols such as "765" is confirmed and displayed. The "reach" is a state in which the left decorative symbol image 26a and the right decorative symbol image 26c are displaying the same numerical image (temporary stop display), and the middle decorative symbol image 26b is variablely displayed. In the present embodiment, when the judgment result of the "special symbol hit judgment process" is a hit, it is configured to always go through the "reach", so that the player can expect a hit. You can say that. The fourth symbol image 26d may simply display a one-digit number or a two-digit number without combining the above-mentioned symbols, and may be hit due to the difference in emission color. It may be possible to identify the type of the pattern, the loss, or the pattern.

(About the symbol display device 27)
The symbol display device 27 is provided outside the game area (outside the outer rail member 18) of the game board 6, which is a region different from the game area 7. As shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100, and executes a "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the first starting port 21. A special symbol display 27a and a second special symbol display 27b for executing a "symbol variation game" based on a game ball entering the second starting port 22 are provided. Here, the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b are composed of the "7" segment display, and in the "symbol fluctuation game", the special symbol is changed from the start of fluctuation to "-". "(Horizontal bar symbol) blinks, and when it is time to derive the judgment result of" special symbol hit detection processing ", if there is a loss,"-"(horizontal bar symbol) is lit up (confirmed display) and hit. If there is, for example, "7" is lit and displayed (confirmed display). That is, the "special symbol" refers to a symbol whose display is controlled by the main control board 100. In the present embodiment, the "special symbol", the above-mentioned left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c, and fourth symbol image 26d are simply referred to as "symbols" or "identified". It may be called "information".

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100, and the "symbol variation game" is held based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 21. The first special symbol hold indicator 27c that displays the number, and the second special symbol hold indicator 27d that displays the number of holds of the "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22. , Are provided. Here, the first special symbol hold indicator 27c and the second special symbol hold indicator 27d are each composed of "2" dot LED indicators, which are "off", "lit", and "blinking". It is possible to display the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is "0", all the dot LED indicators are "off", and when the number of holds is "1", one is "on" and the other is "off". However, if the number of holds is "2", both are "lit", and if the number of holds is "3", one is "lit" and the other is "blinking", and the number of holds is If it is "4", both are "blinking". Further, the first special symbol hold indicator 27c displays the number of holds displayed as the above-mentioned first start port hold number image 26e and the first start port hold ball image display area 26g to the first start port hold ball image display. Be sure to synchronize with the number of holds displayed in the area 26j, and the second special symbol hold indicator 27d has the number of holds displayed as the above-mentioned second start port hold number image 26f and the second start port hold ball. Image display area 26k to second start port hold ball Be sure to synchronize with the number of holds displayed as the image display area 26n. For example, when the first special symbol hold indicator 27c both "blinks" (when the number of holds is "4"), "4" is displayed as the first start port hold number image 26e, and the first start is performed. "4" holding ball images are displayed in the mouth holding ball image display area 26g to the first starting mouth holding ball image display area 26j.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100, and executes a "normal symbol variation game" based on the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20. A display 27e is provided. Here, the ordinary symbol display 27e is composed of "2" dot LED indicators, and in the "ordinary symbol fluctuation game", one is turned on and the other is turned off from the start of fluctuation. When it is time to repeatedly execute the mode of turning off one and turning on the other to derive the judgment result of the "normal symbol collision detection process", if there is a loss, one is turned on and the other is turned off. If it is a hit, one is turned off and the other is turned on.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100, and the number of pending "ordinary symbol variation games" based on the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20 is displayed on the symbol display device 27. An ordinary symbol holding display 27f for displaying is provided. The ordinary symbol hold indicator 27f is composed of "2" dot LED indicators, like the first special symbol hold indicator 27c and the second special symbol hold indicator 27d described above, and is reserved. Since the display mode of the number of the above is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100, and indicates the number of times the large winning opening 24 is opened in the above-mentioned winning game. A round display 27g for displaying "see number)" is provided. Here, the round display 27g is composed of "2" dot LED displays, one of which lights up when "5 rounds of winning game" is executed, and the other of which is "10 rounds of winning game". Lights up when "winning game" is being executed. In this embodiment, since "5 rounds of winning games" and "10 rounds of winning games" are provided, it is composed of "2" dot LED indicators, but it is a hit. The number of dot LED indicators can be changed according to the number of games. For example, when the winning game includes "3" types of winning games, it can be configured by "3" dot LED indicators.

(Internal configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a main control board 100, an effect control board 200, a payout control board 300, and a power supply board 400 mounted on the rear side of the middle frame 3 (see FIG. 2). Then, as shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 communicate only in one direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 via a harness or the like (not shown). Is connected so that Further, the main control board 100 and the payout control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness or the like so as to enable bidirectional communication. Further, the power supply board 400 receives the supply of external power via a power plug (not shown), and supplies the supplied external power to any of the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 300. Even if it is connected so that it can be supplied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 is connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like so that input from various SWs is possible, and display control on various indicators is performed. And, they are connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. so that drive control to various solenoids is possible. Further, the effect control board 200 is connected via a harness, a relay board, etc. so that input from various SWs can be performed, and the harness and the harness can be used to control the display on various indicators. It is connected via a relay board or the like.

(About the main control board 100)
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs control processing, a main ROM 102 that stores a control program required for the control processing, and a main that can read and write necessary for the control processing. A RAM 103 is provided. Although not shown, it also includes an interrupt controller circuit that applies an interrupt signal to the main CPU 101, a hard random number generation circuit that generates random numbers in a certain range, and the like. The control process in the main CPU 101 will be described in detail later with reference to a flowchart.

(About the production control board 200)
As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control board 200 has a sub CPU 201 that performs the effect control process, a sub ROM 202 that stores a control program required for the effect control process, and read / write necessary for the effect control process. A possible sub-RAM 203 is provided. Further, an RTC (real-time clock) device 204 that outputs date information and time information to the effect control board 200 is provided. Although not shown, an interrupt controller circuit that applies an interrupt signal to the sub CPU 201, a hard random number generation circuit that generates a random number in a certain range, and the like are provided. Further, as the effect control, the display control of the image display device 26, the audio output control of the speaker 10, the light emission control of the light emitting device 9 and the panel lighting device 29 described later, and the panel drive device 30 described later are used. The drive control of the movable body 28 is mentioned, and the VDP (Video Display Processor) and the image ROM and the VRAM which are responsible for the display control of the image display device 26, and the sound source IC, the audio ROM and the audio RAM, and the light emission which are responsible for the audio output control of the speaker 10. A lamp CPU, a lamp ROM, a lamp RAM, etc., which are responsible for controlling light emission of the device 9 and the panel lighting device 29, are provided. The control process in the sub CPU 201 will be described in detail later with reference to a flowchart.

(About payout control board 300)
As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 300 includes a payout CPU 301 that performs payout control processing, a payout ROM 302 that stores a control program required for the payout control process, and read / write necessary for the payout control process. A possible payout RAM 303 is provided. Further, a payout device 304 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the payout device 304, the game ball is paid out to the upper tray 5a. More specifically, in the main control board 100, for example, when the information that the game ball is detected from the first start port detection SW21a described later is input, the main control is such that the prize ball of the "3" ball is paid out. A payout command signal is transmitted from the board 100 to the payout control board 300, and the payout control board 300 that receives the payout command signal pays out the prize balls of the “3” balls to the upper tray 5a by controlling the payout device 304. .. Then, when the payout of the prize ball of the "3" ball is completed, the payout completion signal is transmitted from the payout control board 300 to the main control board 100, and the information that the game ball is detected is input from the first start port detection SW21a. Complete the payout of the game ball for what you have done.

Further, the launch handle 8 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and the launch handle 8 is gripped by the player and the rotation amount of the launch handle 8 described above is input. It has become like. Further, a launching device 305 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the launching device 305, a game ball is launched into the game area 7. More specifically, when the payout control board 300 is gripped by the player from the launch handle 8 and the rotation amount of the launch handle 8 is input, the payout control board 300 corresponds to the rotation amount of the launch handle 8. The launching device 305 is controlled by the firing intensity to launch the game ball. Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 300 is connected via a ball lending unit or the like so that an input signal from the ball lending button 12 shown in FIG. 1 can be received. When the lending button 12 is operated by the player, the payout control board 300 controls the payout device 304, so that the number of balls corresponding to "1" operations of the ball lending button 12 (for example, "125" balls). ) Is paid out to the upper tray 5a.

(About power supply board 400)
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 300 are connected to the power supply board 400 via a harness or the like, and as described above, the power supply plug (not shown). The external power is supplied via the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 300. Although not shown, the power supply board 400 is provided with a conversion circuit or the like that converts external power (AC 100 volts) into DC 24 volts.

(About frame opening detection SW3a)
The frame opening detection SW3a is provided on the outer frame 2 and the middle frame 3, respectively, and is a SW for detecting the open / closed state of the middle frame 3. That is, the frame opening detection SW3a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and are closed when the middle frame 3 is housed in the outer frame 2 (closed state). Information on the state will be input to the main control board 100. Then, the main control board 100 into which the information in the closed state is input can detect that the middle frame 3 is housed in the outer frame 2. On the other hand, when the middle frame 3 is not housed in the outer frame 2 (open state), the above-mentioned closed state information is not input to the main control board 100 and is not input to the main control board 100. 100 can detect that the middle frame 3 is not housed with respect to the outer frame 2. In this way, by detecting the open / closed state of the middle frame 3 using the frame opening detection SW3a, for example, it is possible to detect an illegal act against the setting changing device 31.

(About gate detection SW20a)
The gate detection SW 20a is provided inside the passage port of the gate member 20 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20. That is, the gate detection SW 20a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and when the passage of the game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Become. Then, the main control board 100 into which the detected information is input does not execute the "normal symbol change game" on the normal symbol hold indicator 27f, and the number of holds of the "normal symbol change game" is "0". If, it is controlled to immediately execute the "ordinary symbol variation game", and if the number of holds of the "ordinary symbol variation game" is "1" to "3", the "ordinary symbol variation game" is executed. Is controlled to be suspended, and when the number of pending "normal symbol variation games" is "4", the execution of the "ordinary symbol variation game" is controlled not to be suspended.

(About the first start port detection SW21a)
The first start port detection SW 21a is provided inside the winning opening of the first starting port 21 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that the game ball has entered the first starting port 21. That is, the first start port detection SW21a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Will be done. Then, the main control board 100 into which the detected information is input causes the payout control board 300 to pay out the game ball of the "3" ball as a prize ball due to the game ball entering the first starting port 21. Perform processing. Further, the main control board 100 does not execute the "symbol variation game" on either the first special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b, and the first special symbol hold display 27c, When the number of holds of the second special symbol display 27d is "0", the first special symbol display 27a is immediately controlled to execute the "symbol variation game", and the first special symbol hold display is displayed. When the number of holds of the "symbol change game" in the device 27c is "1" to "3", the execution of the "design change game" is controlled to be held, and the "design hold indicator 27c" in the first special symbol hold indicator 27c is controlled to hold. When the number of hold of the "symbol change game" is "4", it is controlled not to hold the execution of the "design change game". Further, the main control board 100 has a "symbol variation game" on the first special symbol hold indicator 27c, except when the number of "symbol variation games" held on the first special symbol hold indicator 27c is "4". A first start port winning command indicating that the number of holds has been updated (increased) is transmitted to the effect control board 200. As a result, the effect control board 200 can also recognize the number of holds of the "design variation game" on the first special symbol hold indicator 27c. When the number of holds of the "design variation game" on the first special symbol hold indicator 27c is "4", the first start opening winning command may be transmitted to the effect control board 200.

(About the second start port detection SW22a)
The second starting port detection SW 22a is provided inside the winning opening of the second starting opening 22, and is a SW for detecting that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 22. That is, the second start port detection SW22a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Will be done. Then, the main control board 100 into which the detected information is input causes the payout control board 300 to pay out the game ball of the "2" ball as a prize ball due to the game ball entering the second starting port 22. Perform processing. Further, the main control board 100 does not execute the "symbol change game" on either the first special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b, and the second special symbol hold display 27d When the number of holds is "0", the second special symbol display 27b is immediately controlled to execute the "symbol change game", and the second special symbol hold display 27d is used for the "design change game". When the number of holds is "1" to "3", the execution of the "design change game" is controlled to be held, and the number of holds of the "design change game" on the second special symbol hold indicator 27d is If it is "4", it is controlled so that the execution of the "design variation game" is not suspended. Further, the main control board 100 has a "symbol variation game" on the second special symbol hold indicator 27d, except when the number of "symbol variation games" held on the second special symbol hold indicator 27d is "4". A second start port winning command indicating that the number of holds has been updated (increased) is transmitted to the effect control board 200. As a result, the effect control board 200 can also recognize the number of holds of the "design variation game" on the second special symbol hold indicator 27d. When the number of holds of the "design variation game" on the second special symbol hold indicator 27d is "4", the second start opening winning command may be transmitted to the effect control board 200.

(About the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 22b)
The second starting port opening / closing solenoid 22b is provided behind the second starting port 22 and is a solenoid for causing the protruding member provided in the above-mentioned second starting port 22 to perform the opening / closing operation. That is, the second start port opening / closing solenoid 22b and the main control board 100 are connected to each other via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the main control board 100 is determined to be a hit by the above-mentioned "normal symbol hit determination process". In this case, the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 22b is driven and controlled in order to open / close in the opening / closing mode shown in the “second starting port opening / closing mode” of FIG. 6 (B).

(Regarding normal winning opening detection SW23a)
The normal winning opening detection SW 23a is provided inside the winning opening of the ordinary winning opening 23 of the game board 6, and is a SW for detecting that the game ball has entered the ordinary winning opening 23. That is, the normal winning opening detection SW23a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Will be. Then, the main control board 100 into which the detected information is input is a process for causing the payout control board 300 to pay out the game balls of "8" balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the normal winning opening 23. I do.

(About the big winning opening detection SW24a)
The large winning opening detection SW 24a is provided inside the winning opening of the large winning opening 24 of the game board 6 and is a SW for detecting that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 24. That is, the large winning opening detection SW24a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. Will be. Then, the main control board 100 into which the detected information is input is a process for causing the payout control board 300 to pay out the game balls of "10" balls as prize balls due to the game balls entering the large winning opening 24. I do. Further, the main control board 100 transmits a large winning opening winning command indicating that the game ball has entered the large winning opening 24 to the effect control board 200. As a result, the effect control board 200 can also recognize the entry status of the game ball into the large winning opening 24.

(About the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 24b)
The large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 24b is provided behind the large winning opening 24, and is a solenoid for causing the opening / closing door provided in the above-mentioned large winning opening 24 to perform an opening / closing operation. That is, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 24b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and when the main control board 100 is determined to be a hit by the "special symbol hit determination process", In order to open and close the opening / closing door over the number of rounds given in FIG. 6A, which will be described later, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 24b is driven and controlled.

(About the out port detection SW25a)
The out port detection SW 25a is provided inside the entrance of the out port 25, and is a SW for detecting that the game ball has entered the out port 25. That is, the out port detection SW25a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and when the entry of a game ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. It will be. Thereby, the number of out balls can be grasped on the main control board 100.

(About the 1st special symbol display 27a)
The first special symbol display 27a is provided on the symbol display device 27, is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100, and executes a "symbol variation game" based on a game ball entering the first starting port 21. It is a display to do. That is, the first special symbol display 27a and the main control board 100 are connected to each other via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the main control board 100 is a "design variation game" in the first special symbol display 27a. When the execution condition is satisfied, the display control of the "symbol variation game" is performed on the first special symbol display 27a. It should be noted that the execution condition of the "design variation game" on the first special symbol display 27a is determined to be negative in the process of step S103-2-4 in the "special symbol variation start processing" (see FIG. 12) described later. Applicable when it is done.

(About the 2nd special symbol display 27b)
The second special symbol display 27b is provided on the symbol display device 27, is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100, and executes a "symbol variation game" based on a game ball entering the second starting port 22. It is a display to do. That is, the second special symbol display 27b and the main control board 100 are connected to each other via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the main control board 100 is used in the “design variation game” of the second special symbol display 27b. When the execution condition is satisfied, the display control of the "symbol variation game" is performed on the second special symbol display 27b. It should be noted that the execution condition of the "symbol variation game" on the second special symbol display 27b was negatively determined in the process of step S103-2-1 in the "process at the start of special symbol variation" (see FIG. 12). When is applicable.

(About the 1st special symbol hold indicator 27c)
The first special symbol holding display 27c is provided in the symbol display device 27, is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100, and is a "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the first starting port 21. It is an indicator for displaying the number of holds. That is, the first special symbol holding display 27c and the main control board 100 are connected to each other via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the main control board 100 has information that the game ball is detected from the first start port detection SW21a. Is input to control the display of the first special symbol hold indicator 27c (lights from off or blinks from lights) when the upper limit of hold (“4”) has not been reached. On the other hand, when the "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the currently fluctuating first start port 21 ends, the display control of the first special symbol hold indicator 27c is performed (lights from blinking or lights). Turn off from).

(About the 2nd special symbol hold indicator 27d)
The second special symbol holding display 27d is provided in the symbol display device 27, is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100, and is a "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22. It is an indicator for displaying the number of holds. That is, the second special symbol hold indicator 27d and the main control board 100 are connected to each other via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the main control board 100 has information that the game ball is detected from the second start port detection SW22a. Is input to control the display of the second special symbol hold indicator 27d (lights from off or blinks from lights) when the upper limit of hold (“4”) has not been reached. On the other hand, when the "symbol change game" based on the game ball entering the currently fluctuating second start port 22 ends, the second special symbol hold indicator 27d is displayed and controlled (lights up or lights up from blinking). Turn off from).

(About ordinary symbol display 27e)
The normal symbol display 27e is provided on the symbol display device 27, and is a display for executing a "normal symbol variation game" whose display is controlled by the main control board 100. That is, the normal symbol display 27e and the main control board 100 are connected to each other via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the main control board 100 has the execution conditions of the "normal symbol variation game" on the normal symbol display 27e. When it is established, the display control of the "ordinary symbol variation game" is performed on the ordinary symbol display 27e.

(Regarding the normal symbol hold indicator 27f)
The normal symbol hold display 27f is provided on the symbol display device 27, and is displayed and controlled by the main control board 100. It is a display for displaying. That is, the normal symbol hold display 27f and the main control board 100 are connected to each other via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the main control board 100 holds the game ball when the information that the game ball is detected from the gate detection SW20a is input. When the upper limit value (“4”) of is not reached, the display control of the normal symbol hold indicator 27f (lights from off or blinks from lights). On the other hand, when the currently fluctuating "normal symbol fluctuation game" is completed, the display control of the normal symbol hold indicator 27f (turns on from blinking or turns off from lighting).

(About round display 27g)
The round display 27g is provided on the symbol display device 27, is display-controlled by the main control board 100, and is a display for displaying the number of times the large winning opening 24 is opened in the above-mentioned winning game. That is, the round display 27g and the main control board 100 are connected to each other via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the "design variation game" determined to be a hit by the "special symbol hit detection process" is completed, and the first At the timing of displaying a special symbol (for example, "7") indicating a hit on the special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b, the round display 27g corresponding to the determined winning game is lit and controlled. Then, when the winning game is being executed, the round display 27g is continuously turned on and controlled, and when the winning game is completed, the round display 27g is turned off. In the present embodiment, since there are two types of granting rounds, a round indicator 27g is provided, but if only one type of granting rounds is provided, it is necessary to provide a round indicator 27g. do not have.

(About the setting change device 31)
The setting change device 31 is provided on the rear side of the middle frame 3 and is a device for setting a set value to be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, as described in the above description of FIG. 2, the setting changing device 31 includes a setting changing keyhole 31a, a setting changing button 31b, a setting confirmation button 31c, and a setting display unit 31d. For example, for setting change. When the setting change key is inserted into the keyhole 31a and rotated by 90 degrees, information indicating that the state is in that state is input to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 has the current set value on the setting display unit 31d. Is controlled to be displayed. Further, when the setting change button 31b is operated in a state where the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31a and rotated 90 degrees, information indicating that the setting change button 31b is operated is input to the main control board 100 and is mainly used. The control board 100 controls the setting display unit 31d to display the setting value of the next stage of the current setting value. For example, if the setting change button 31b is operated while the setting value "1" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, the setting value "2" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d and the setting value "2" is displayed. If the setting change button 31b is operated while the setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, the setting value "3" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d and the setting value "3" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d. If the setting change button 31b is operated while the setting value is being set, the setting value "4" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, and the setting value "4" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d. Is operated, the set value "1" is displayed on the setting display unit 31d. Further, when the setting confirmation button 31c is operated while the current setting value is displayed on the setting display unit 31d, information indicating the operation is input to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 receives the operation. , The set value displayed on the setting display unit 31d is stored in the main RAM 103. After that, the game is controlled based on the set value stored in the main RAM 103 (for example, it corresponds to the set value shown in FIGS. 5 (A-1) to (A-4). Refer to the special symbol collision detection table).

(About light emitting device 9)
As described in FIG. 1, the light emitting device 9 is composed of a lamp, an LED, and the like, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be decorated by light emission. That is, the light emitting device 9 and the effect control board 200 are connected to each other via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the light emitting device 9 emits light under the control of the effect control board 200.

(About speaker 10)
As described in FIG. 1, the speaker 10 can output voice and sound effects. Further, if the information in the closed state is not input from the frame open detection SW3a described above, it is possible to output a notification sound indicating that the middle frame 3 is in the open state. That is, the speaker 10 and the effect control board 200 are connected to each other via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the above-mentioned sound is output from the speaker 10 under the control of the effect control board 200.

(About board lighting device 29)
The board lighting device 29 is provided on the game board 6, and like the light emitting device 9 provided on the glass frame 4 described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be decorated by light emission. That is, the board lighting device 29 and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the board lighting device 29 emits light under the control of the effect control board 200. The panel lighting device 29 may be provided with a light guide plate capable of displaying a predetermined image by projecting light.

(About the panel drive device 30)
The board drive device 30 is provided on, for example, a game board 6 or a movable body 28, and is composed of a motor for moving the movable body 28 in the vertical direction and the like. That is, the panel drive device 30 and the effect control board 200 are connected to each other via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and the panel drive device 30 is driven and controlled by the control of the effect control board 200.

(About movable body 28)
The movable body 28 is provided on the game board 6 and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction when executing the “movable body notice” described later. Here, the "movable" of the movable body 28 includes "fall", "swing", "rotation" and the like in the "movable body notice" shown in FIG. 20 described later.

(About effect button detection SW14a)
The effect button detection SW 14a is provided on the effect button 14, and is a SW for detecting that the effect button 14 is pressed by the player when the effect button 14 is in the operation valid period. That is, the effect button detection SW 14a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed is input to the effect control board 200. ing. Then, the effect control board 200, which has input the information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed, controls the effect corresponding to the press of the effect button 14 via the image display device 26 and the speaker 10. Here, for example, in the "design variation game", the effect button 14 sets the operation valid period over a predetermined time, and the effect button detection SW14a detects only the pressing when the operation valid period is set.

(About the effect lever detection SW15a)
The effect lever detection SW 15a is provided on the effect lever 15, and is a SW for detecting that the effect lever 15 has been operated by the player when the effect lever 15 is in the operation effective period. That is, the effect lever detection SW 15a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated is input to the effect control board 200. ing. Then, the effect control board 200, which has input information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated, controls the effect according to the operation of the effect lever 15 via the image display device 26 and the speaker 10. Here, for example, in the "design variation game", the effect lever 15 sets the operation valid period over a predetermined time, and the effect lever detection SW15a detects only the operation when the operation valid period is set.

(About cross key detection SW16a)
The cross key detection SW 16a is provided on the cross key button 16 and is a SW for detecting that the cross key button 16 is pressed by the player. That is, the cross key detection SW 16a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, a relay board, or the like, and information indicating that the cross key button 16 has been operated is input to the effect control board 200. It has become. As described above, the amount of light emitted from the light emitting device 9 and the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26 described later can be adjusted by operating the cross key button 16. Specifically, pressing the up button of the cross key button 16 can increase the amount of light (stepwise), and pressing the down button of the cross key button 16 lowers the amount of light (step by step). By pressing the right button of the cross key button 16, the volume can be increased (in steps), and by pressing the left button of the cross key button 16, the volume can be decreased (in steps). .. The amount of light may be set in three stages of "strong", "medium", and "weak", or may be set in five further subdivided stages. Further, the volume may be set in three stages of "high", "medium", and "low", or may be set in five further subdivided stages. Further, a level gauge image showing the degree of adjustment of the amount of light and the volume may be emitted, or an adjustment sound may be emitted. The amount of light and the volume can be adjusted when the "design variation game" is not performed, but it may be executed even when the "symbol variation game" is being performed. .. In this case, it is preferable to make adjustments without emitting the above-mentioned level gauge image or adjustment sound, or by displaying the adjustment sound in a small size and outputting the adjustment sound at a low volume. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect image and the effect sound corresponding to the "design variation game" from being disturbed by the level gauge image and the adjustment sound.

(About the special symbol collision detection table)
The special symbol hit detection tables of FIGS. 5 (A-1) to 5 (A-4) are stored in the main ROM 102. Here, in the present embodiment, the setting value of the "4" stage can be set by the setting changing device 31 described above. Then, when "1" is set as the set value, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol hit determination table for the set value "1" shown in (A-1) and "special symbol hit determination process". When "2" is set as the set value, the "special symbol hit determination process" is performed with reference to the special symbol hit determination table for the set value "2" shown in (A-2). When "3" is set as the set value, the "special symbol hit determination process" is performed with reference to the special symbol hit determination table for the set value "3" shown in (A-3), and the set value is set. When "4" is set, the "special symbol hit determination process" is performed with reference to the special symbol hit determination table for the set value "4" shown in (A-4). Further, "common to the first start port and the second start port" is a special reference regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22. It shows that the symbol hit detection table is common. The setting value that can be set by the setting changing device 31 is not limited to the "4" stage, and can be any setting. For example, it may be in the "6" stage or in the "3" stage.

In the special symbol hit detection table for the set value "1" of (A-1), the "special symbol hit determination" is determined when the game state is the "normal game state" and when the game state is the "time saving game state". When the probability of being determined as "hit" in "processing" is "1/280", the probability of being determined as "missing" is "279/280", and the gaming state is "probability changing gaming state". In the above, the probability of being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hit determination process" is "1/28", and the probability of being determined as "missing" is "27/28". That is, when the game state is the "probability change game state", the probability of being judged as "hit" fluctuates "10" times as much as the "normal game state" or the "time saving game state". It can be said that the "game state" is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the "normal game state" and the "short-time game state". Further, in the "time saving game state" and the "probability variation game state", as compared with the "normal game state", as shown in FIG. 5 (B) described later and FIG. 6 (B) described later, "normal" In the "design hit determination process", an advantageous opening / closing mode is selected as the opening / closing mode of the protruding member of the second starting port 22 when the hit "hit" is easily hit. The "gaming state" is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, then the "short-time gaming state" is the advantageous gaming state for the player, and the "normal gaming state" is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In the following description, the "normal game state" and the "short-time game state" may be collectively referred to as the "low probability state", and the "probability variation game state" is referred to as the "high probability state". There is. In addition, the "low probability state" may be referred to as "non-variable short-term medium" or "non-variable single state", and the "probability variable gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state" are collectively referred to as "variable short-term". It may be called "medium", "variable short", or "improved ball entry rate".

In the special symbol hit detection table for the set value "2" of (A-2), the "special symbol hit determination" is determined when the game state is the "normal game state" and when the game state is the "time saving game state". When the probability of being judged as "hit" in "processing" is "1/290", the probability of being judged as "missing" is "289/290", and the gaming state is "probability changing gaming state". In the above, the probability of being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hit determination process" is "1/29", and the probability of being determined as "missing" is "28/29". Therefore, when "2" is set as the set value, the probability of being judged as "hit" in the "special symbol hit determination process" is lower than when "1" is set as the set value. It is disadvantageous for the player.

In the special symbol hit detection table for the set value "3" of (A-3), the "special symbol hit determination" is determined when the game state is the "normal game state" and when the game state is the "time saving game state". When the probability of being judged as "hit" in "processing" is "1/300", the probability of being judged as "missing" is "299/300", and the gaming state is "probability changing gaming state". In the above, the probability of being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hit determination process" is "1/30", and the probability of being determined as "missing" is "29/30". Therefore, when "3" is set as the set value, the probability of being judged as "hit" in the "special symbol hit determination process" is lower than when "2" is set as the set value. It is disadvantageous for the player.

In the special symbol hit detection table for the set value "4" of (A-4), the "special symbol hit determination" is determined when the game state is the "normal game state" and when the game state is the "time saving game state". When the probability of being determined as "hit" in "processing" is "1/310", the probability of being determined as "missing" is "309/310", and the gaming state is "probability changing gaming state". In the above, the probability of being determined as "hit" in the "special symbol hit determination process" is "1/31", and the probability of being determined as "missing" is "30/31". Therefore, when "4" is set as the set value, the probability of being judged as "hit" in the "special symbol hit determination process" is lower than when "3" is set as the set value. It is disadvantageous for the player. That is, as for the set value, the set value "1" is the most advantageous set value for the player, then the set value "2" is the advantageous set value for the player, and then the set value "3" is the set value for the player. It is an advantageous setting value, and the setting value "4" is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player.

(Regarding the normal symbol collision detection table)
The normal symbol hit detection table of FIG. 5B is stored in the main ROM 102. Then, when the gaming state is the "normal gaming state", the probability of being determined as "hit" in the "normal symbol hit determination process" is "4/256", and the probability of being determined as "missing" is "missing". It is "252/256", and the probability of being judged as "hit" in the "normal symbol hit detection process" is "251" in the "time saving game state" and in the "probability variation game state". In "/ 256", the probability of being judged as "missing" is "5/256". Therefore, in the case of "time saving game state" or "probability variation game state", it is easier to be determined as "hit" in the "normal symbol hit detection process" than in the case of "normal game state", and the game. It can be said that it is an advantageous gaming state for the person. In the present embodiment, the set value is not provided in the normal symbol hit determination table, but the set value may be provided in the same manner as in the special symbol hit determination table. For example, the set value "1" may be easier to hit in the normal symbol hit determination than the set value "2".

(About the special symbol determination table)
The special symbol determination table of FIG. 6 (A) is "hit" as a result of performing "special symbol hit determination processing" based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 21, and "hit". In the case of "loss", it is referred to when determining the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display 27a. (1) The table for the first starting port 21 and the game ball are placed in the second starting port 22. As a result of performing the "special symbol hit determination process" based on the ball entering, the special symbol that is confirmed and displayed on the second special symbol display 27b depending on whether it is a "hit" or a "miss". It has two tables, one for the second starting port 22 and the other for reference when determining the above, and these are stored in the main ROM 102. Then, in the "special symbol determination process" (see FIG. 12) described later, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol by referring to the table corresponding to the start port into which the game ball has entered.

Then, in the special symbol determination table of FIG. 6 (A) (1), if the result of the "special symbol hit determination process" being "hit", the main CPU 101 is set to "special symbol A", "special symbol A", " One of the special symbols is determined from "special symbol B" and "special symbol C". Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number for determining a special symbol is referred to to obtain one of the special symbols. decide. For example, if the acquired random number for determining the special symbol is "0 to 9", "special symbol A" is determined, and if the acquired random number for determining the special symbol is "10 to 64", "special symbol B" is determined. If the acquired random number for determining the special symbol is "65-99", the "special symbol C" is determined. Then, when the special symbol is determined, the "number of rounds granted" and the "game state after winning" are uniquely determined. When the "special symbol A" is determined, "10" rounds are given as the "number of rounds given", and "probability changing game state" is given as the "game state after winning". When the "special symbol B" is determined, "5" rounds are given as the "number of rounds given", and "probability changing game state" is given as the "game state after winning". When the "special symbol C" is determined, "10" rounds are given as the "number of rounds given", and "normal game state" is given as the "game state after winning". On the other hand, if the result of the "special symbol hit determination process" is "missing", the main CPU 101 determines the "special symbol D", and the "special symbol D" includes the "number of rounds granted" and Since the "game state after hitting" is not defined, the winning game is not given.

Further, in the special symbol determination table of FIG. 6 (A) (2), if the result of the "special symbol hit determination process" being "hit", the main CPU 101 is set to "special symbol E", "special symbol E", " One of the special symbols is determined from "Special symbol F". Since the specific determination method is the same as (1) of FIG. 6 (A) described above, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, for example, if the acquired random number for determining the special symbol is "0 to 64", the "special symbol E" is determined, and if the acquired random number for determining the special symbol is "65-99", the "special symbol" is determined. Determine "F". When the "special symbol E" is determined, "10" rounds are given as the "number of rounds given", and "probability changing game state" is given as the "game state after winning". When the "special symbol F" is determined, "10" rounds are given as the "number of rounds given", and "normal game state" is given as the "game state after winning". On the other hand, if the result of the "special symbol hit determination process" being "missing", the main CPU 101 determines the "special symbol G". In this way, the ratio of the "probability changing game state" is "65%" for the first starting port 21 and "65%" for the second starting port 22, so that the "probability changing game state" is given. There is no difference in the inrush rate between the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22. On the other hand, the "number of rounds granted" is based on the number of balls entered into the first starting port 21 because the second starting port 22 is always given "10" rounds and no "5" rounds are given. It can be said that it is more advantageous for the player that the hit game is given based on the ball entering the second starting port 22 than the game is given. In the present embodiment, the set value is not provided in the special symbol determination table, but the set value may be provided. For example, the determination ratio of the special symbol may be different depending on whether the set value is "1" or the set value is "4". In that case, the rate of entry into the "probability variation game state" is common to all the set values, but the ratio of the "number of rounds granted" may be different for each set value. For example, the more the set value is "1", the more advantageous the number of rounds may be given, and the more the set value is "4", the more advantageous the number of rounds may be given.

(Regarding the ordinary design determination table)
The ordinary symbol determination table of FIG. 6B is stored in the main ROM 102, and as a result of performing the "ordinary symbol hit determination process" based on the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20, the result is "hit". This is a table to be referred to when determining a normal symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the normal symbol display 27e depending on whether there is a case or a case where the value is “missing”. When the game state is the "normal game state" and the result of the "normal symbol hit determination process" is "hit", the main CPU 101 is the "normal symbol" performed in the "normal symbol related process". In the "decision process", "ordinary symbol A" is determined, and if it is "missing", "ordinary symbol B" is determined. Further, when the main CPU 101 is "hit" as a result of performing "normal symbol hit determination processing" depending on whether the game state is the "time saving game state" or the "probability variation game state". , In the "ordinary symbol determination process" performed in the "ordinary symbol related process", the "ordinary symbol C" is determined, and if it is "missing", the "ordinary symbol D" is determined. In addition, even in the ordinary symbol, the content to be given is uniquely defined as in the case of the special symbol described above. When the "ordinary symbol A" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting port 22 is opened "1" times at "0.9S", and when the "ordinary symbol B" is determined, the second starting port is opened. The protruding member of 22 does not open. Further, when the "ordinary symbol C" is determined, the protruding member of the second starting port 22 is opened "3" times at "1.8S", and when the "ordinary symbol D" is determined, the second The protruding member of the starting port 22 does not open. Therefore, when the "time saving game state" or the "probability variation game state" is a "hit" than in the "normal game state", the opening / closing mode of the protruding member of the second starting port 22 Is advantageous, so it can be said that the gaming state is advantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, the set value is not provided in the normal symbol determination table, but the set value may be provided in the same manner as in the special symbol determination table. For example, the probability of being judged as a hit in the "normal symbol hit detection process" may be different for each set value, and the set value "1" is easier to hit than the set value "4". It may be, and vice versa. Further, the opening / closing mode of the second starting port 22 may be different for each set value. For example, in the case of the set value "1", the opening / closing may be performed in an advantageous opening / closing mode as compared with the case of the set value "4", and vice versa.

(About the special symbol fluctuation pattern table)
The special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 7 is stored in the main ROM 102 and is a table to be referred to when determining the variation time in the “symbol variation game”. When the game state is the "normal game state" and the result of the "special symbol collision detection process" is "missing", the main CPU 101 has "variation pattern 1" to "variation pattern 5". From the inside, determine one of the fluctuation patterns. Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22, a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is acquired, and the acquired random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is referred to. , Determine one of the fluctuation patterns. Although not shown, when the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22, a reach determination random number is acquired, and the reach determination random number corresponds to a random number for executing reach. In this case, one of the fluctuation patterns from "variation pattern 2" to "variation pattern 5" is determined, and when the reach determination random number does not correspond to the random number for executing reach, "variation pattern 1" is selected. You may decide. On the other hand, when the game state is the "normal game state" and the result of the "special symbol hit determination process" is "hit", the main CPU 101 refers to the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern. , "Fluctuation pattern 6" to "Variation pattern 11", one of the fluctuation patterns is determined.

Then, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the "effect content" and the "variation time" (seconds S) are uniquely determined. When the "fluctuation pattern 1" is determined, the "normal variation" is determined as the "effect content", and the "7S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". Here, the "normal fluctuation" means a fluctuation that does not reach. When the "fluctuation pattern 2" is determined, the "normal reach" is determined as the "effect content" and the "15S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". Here, the "normal reach" refers to a reach that is performed but does not particularly perform a development effect (for example, an effect of temporarily stopping and displaying a temporary stop display due to a loss and then changing the intermediate decorative pattern image 26b). Since the selection rate at the time of "hit" is low and the selection rate at the time of "loss" is high, it is positioned as a reach with a low degree of expectation of hit. When the "fluctuation pattern 3" is determined, the "super reach" is determined as the "effect content" and the "40S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". Here, the "super reach" refers to a reach in which a development effect is performed during the execution of the reach (normal reach) and a live-action image is displayed on the image display device 26 at the development destination, for example, at the time of "hit". Since the selection ratio is higher than the "normal reach" and the selection ratio at the time of "loss" is lower than the "normal reach", it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of hitting than the "normal reach". When the "fluctuation pattern 4" is determined, the "pseudo-ream 2 normal reach" is determined as the "effect content", and the "50S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". The "pseudo-ren" will be described in detail later, but the "pseudo-ren 2 normal reach" has a higher expectation of hitting than the "normal reach" alone, and the expectation of hitting is lower than that of the "super reach". It is positioned as. When the "fluctuation pattern 5" is determined, the "pseudo-ream 3 super reach" is determined as the "effect content", and the "70S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". "Pseudo-ren 3 Super Reach" is positioned as a reach with a higher degree of expectation than "Super Reach" alone. It should be noted that "fluctuation pattern 6" to "fluctuation pattern 9" are different from "fluctuation pattern 2" to "fluctuation pattern 5" only in "loss" or "hit", and the production content and fluctuation time are the same. , The description is omitted.

When the "fluctuation pattern 10" is determined, the "pseudo-ream 4 super reach" is determined as the "effect content", and the "90S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". Here, the "pseudo-ream 4 super reach" is a fluctuation pattern that is selected only in the case of "hit". "Hit" is confirmed. When the "fluctuation pattern 11" is determined, the "full rotation reach" is determined as the "effect content" and the "120S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". Here, "full rotation reach" refers to the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c as "111", "222", "333", "444", "555", It is a reach that scrolls in a state of being aligned with "666", "777", and "888", and finally confirms and displays with "777", for example. The "variation pattern 11" may be selected only when the "special symbol A" in FIG. 6 is determined. In this case, not only the "hit" but also the "probability variable game state" is given as the game state after the hit, so that the player is requested to perform the "full rotation reach" to perform the game. This will lead to an improvement in the interest of the game.

In addition, the main CPU 101 may be "lost" as a result of performing "special symbol collision detection processing" when the game state is the "time saving game state" and when the game state is the "probability variation game state". , "Fluctuation pattern 12" to "Variation pattern 15", one of the fluctuation patterns is determined. When the "fluctuation pattern 12" is determined, the "shortening variation" is determined as the "effect content", and the "2S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". Here, the "shortening variation" refers to a variation in which the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c are stopped at the same time without reaching, and the game state is "time saving game". When the "state" and the "probability change game state" are "missing" as a result of performing the "special symbol collision detection process", this "shortening variation" is likely to be selected. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently digest the "short-time game state" and the "probability change game state". When the "fluctuation pattern 13" is determined, the "reach fanning" is determined as the "effect content", and the "10S" is determined as the "fluctuation time". Here, "reach fanning" means, for example, whether or not to temporarily stop and display the "7" symbol as the left decorative symbol image 26a and to temporarily stop and display the "7" symbol as the right decorative symbol image 26c. So, it is a production that fuels whether or not reach is formed. As a result of performing "reach fanning", for example, when the "8" symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c, the reach is not formed, and for example, the "7" symbol is provisionally displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c. When the stop display is displayed, a reach is formed, and the image develops into a "variable short and medium super reach" in the "variation pattern 15" and "variation pattern 17" described later. When the "fluctuation pattern 14" is determined, the "effect content" is determined to be "variable short and medium super reach", and the "fluctuation time" is determined to be "30S". Here, the "changed short and medium super reach" is a "super reach" dedicated to the "time saving game state" and the "probability changing game state", and is different from the "super reach" performed in the "normal game state". ing. When the "fluctuation pattern 15" is determined, "reach fanning-> variable / short / medium super reach" is determined as the "effect content", and "40S" is determined as the "variation time". Regarding "fluctuation pattern 16" and "fluctuation pattern 17", there is only a difference between "fluctuation pattern 14" and "fluctuation pattern 15" and "loss" or "hit", and the production content and fluctuation time are the same. The explanation is omitted. In addition, the selection ratio at the time of "hit" is higher than that at the time of "hit", and the selection ratio at the time of "loss" is higher than that at the time of "change / short / medium super reach". Since it is configured low, it is positioned as a reach with a higher degree of expectation than the "Variable Short Medium Super Reach".

The above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 7, and may further include a plurality of special symbol variation patterns. For example, the "shortening variation" (2S) may be provided even in the normal gaming state. Further, the special symbol variation pattern table referred to may be different depending on the number of reserved balls in the "design variation game" of the first starting port 21, or the number of reserved balls in the "symbol variation game" of the second starting port 22. The special symbol variation pattern table referred to by may be different. For example, in the case of "loss", when the number of reserved balls is "4", select "normal fluctuation" of "variation pattern 1" rather than when the number of reserved balls is "1". It may be facilitated to improve the operation of the game. In addition, when the loss is determined in the "short-time game state" or the "probability change game state", as a result of starting the "design variation game" of the second start port 22, the number of reserved balls in the second start port 22 is increased. When it becomes "0", for example, a hold 0 o'clock normal fluctuation (loss) consisting of 30S may be selected to secure a time for the game ball to enter the second starting port 22. Further, the special symbol variation pattern table to be referred to may be different depending on the set value. For example, a special symbol variation pattern that is easy to select for each set value may be provided, or a special symbol variation pattern that can be selected only by the set value may be provided. As a result, it is possible to infer (or grasp) how many set values are from the effect content of the executed special symbol variation pattern, which leads to improvement of the game entertainment.

(Regarding the control processing performed by the main CPU 101)
The control process performed by the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 14. The control program shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 8 to 14 is stored in the main ROM 102, and the main CPU 101 reads the control program from the main ROM 102 and performs control processing according to the read control program.

(About main control board main processing)
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main processing performed on the main control board 100. This process is started by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a voltage is supplied to each control board from the power supply board 400.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process for initializing the values of registers provided inside. Then, when the initial setting process is completed, the process shifts to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31a in the setting change device 31 and the setting change key is rotated by 90 degrees. As a result, if the setting change key is rotated by 90 degrees, the process shifts to step S3, and if the setting change key is not rotated by 90 degrees, the process shifts to step S5.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the frame opening detection SW is ON. For example, the frame opening detection SW3a determines the process based on whether or not the closed state information is input to the main control board 100. As a result, when the frame open detection SW is ON (closed state), the process shifts to step S4, and when the frame open detection SW is not ON (open state), the process shifts to step S7. do.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an error. For example, a command related to error information is set so that an error is continuously notified via the speaker 10 or the like unless an error canceling operation is performed by the administrator of the gaming machine. Since the operation of changing the setting value is performed by the administrator by opening the middle frame 3 from the outer frame 2, the setting change key is pressed even though the middle frame 3 is housed in the outer frame 2. The event that it is rotated and is in the setting change position is highly likely to have been fraudulent. In such a case, an error occurs in step S4. Then, after the processing is completed, the machine waits until the error canceling operation is performed by the administrator of the gaming machine. The details of the error notification performed on the effect control board 200 side will be described later.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RAM clear SW is ON. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the RAM clear SW is a SW provided on the back surface of the middle frame 3. For example, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear SW, the process is performed. Therefore, it is determined that the RAM clear SW is ON. As a result, when the RAM clear SW is ON, the process shifts to step S6, and when the RAM clear SW is not ON, the process shifts to step S12. If the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on while the setting change key is rotated 90 degrees and the RAM clear SW is pressed, the above-mentioned process of step S2 is prioritized. , The process of step S5 may be configured to give priority.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 101 initializes the area of the main RAM 103 (excluding the area in which the set value is stored). For example, the value held when the power is cut off will be initialized in the process, and when the game store is closed in the "time saving game state" or the "probability change game state", it will be initialized in the process. By doing so, the "normal game state" will be set. Then, when the initialization of the main RAM 103 is completed, the process shifts to step S12.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 101 initializes the area of the main RAM 103 (including the area in which the set value is stored). For example, the value held when the power is cut off will be initialized in the process, and when the game store is closed in the "time saving game state" or the "probability change game state", it will be initialized in the process. By doing so, the "normal game state" will be set. Then, when the initialization of the main RAM 103 is completed, the process shifts to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 101 sets information indicating that the set value is being changed in the command transmission area provided in the output port of the main control board 100. Then, the command set in the command transmission area is transmitted to the effect control board 200 in the command transmission process of the main control board timer interrupt process described later. The effect mode and the notification mode based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when a command indicating that the set value is being changed is set, the process shifts to step S9.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 101 performs a process of switching the set value each time the setting change button 31b in the setting change device 31 inputs an operated signal. For example, if a signal for which the setting change button is operated is input when the setting value is "1", the setting value is switched to "2", and when the setting value is "2", the setting change button is operated. When a signal is input, the set value is switched to "3", and when the set value is "3", when the signal for which the setting change button is operated is input, the set value is switched to "4" and the set value is "4". If the signal for which the setting change button is operated is input, the setting value is switched to "1". The switched set value is displayed on the setting display unit 31d as described above. Then, when the set value change process is completed, the process shifts to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the set value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the set value confirmation operation has been performed depending on whether or not the information indicating that the above-mentioned setting confirmation button 31c has been operated has been input. As a result, when the information indicating that the setting confirmation button 31c has been operated is input, the process shifts to step S11, and when the information indicating that the setting confirmation button 31c has been operated is not input, the relevant information is obtained. Loop the process. Unless the information indicating that the setting confirmation button 31c has been operated is input, the setting change key may not be returned from the position rotated by 90 degrees, or the setting confirmation button 31c has been operated. Although the information indicating the above is not input, it may be determined that the set value confirmation operation has been performed when the setting change key is returned to the original position from the position rotated by 90 degrees.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 101 stores the set value in the main RAM 103. For example, if there is a setting value confirmation operation when the setting value is "1", the setting value "1" is stored in the main RAM 103, and when the setting value is "2", the setting value confirmation operation is performed. If there is, the set value "2" is stored in the main RAM 103, and if there is a set value confirmation operation when the set value is "3", the set value "3" is stored in the main RAM 103. If the set value is confirmed when the set value is "4", the set value "4" is stored in the main RAM 103. In this process, after the set value is stored in the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 proceeds with the game based on the set value stored in the main RAM 103 unless the set value is changed in FIG. Will be done. Then, when the set value is stored in the main RAM 103, the process shifts to step S12.

(Step S12)
In step S12, the main CPU 101 sets the information (set value information command) related to the set value stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11 in the above-mentioned command transmission area. For example, when the set value "1" is stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11, a command indicating the information of the set value "1" is set, and when the set value "2" is stored, the set value "2" is set. When a command indicating information is set and the set value "3" is stored, a command indicating information of the set value "3" is set. Then, the command set in the command transmission area is transmitted to the effect control board 200 in the command transmission process of the main control board timer interrupt process described later. The effect mode and the notification mode based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when a command indicating the information of the set value is set, the process shifts to step S13.

In the present embodiment, the set value information command is set and transmitted to the effect control board 200 only in this process. For example, apart from this process, the special case of FIG. 12 described later will be described. In the processing at the start of the symbol variation, the variation may be transmitted every time. With this configuration, even if the set value information command set in this process cannot be transmitted to the effect control board 200 due to a command transmission error, the game ball will be subsequently moved to one of the starting ports. When the ball is entered and the special symbol change start processing of FIG. 12 is performed, the set value information command can be transmitted to the effect control board 200. Note that only in this process, when the set value information command is set and transmitted to the effect control board 200, and the effect cannot be transmitted to the effect control board 200 due to a command transmission error, the effect control board 200 It suffices to notify that it has not been received normally.

(Step S13)
In step S13, the main CPU 101 prohibits an interrupt of the main control board timer interrupt process that is executed by periodically interrupting the main control board main process. Then, when the interrupt is disabled, the process shifts to step S14.

(Step S14)
In step S14, the main CPU 101 updates initial value random numbers such as a hit determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number. Then, when the various random number update processes are completed, the process shifts to step S15.

(Step S15)
In step S15, the main CPU 101 permits an interrupt of the main control board timer interrupt process, which is executed by periodically interrupting the main control board main process. Then, when the interrupt is permitted, the process shifts to step S13 again, and thereafter, steps S13 to S15 are looped.

(About main control board timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a main control board timer interrupt process performed on the main control board 100. This process is a process that is executed by periodically interrupting the above-mentioned main control board main process.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 101 updates initial value random numbers such as a hit determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number. Then, when the various random number update processes in one interrupt cycle are completed, the process shifts to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 101 detects the input from each SW shown in FIG. The process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, after detecting the input from each SW in one interrupt cycle, the process shifts to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs a process related to the special symbol. The process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the processing related to the special symbol in one interrupt cycle is completed, the processing shifts to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 101 performs a process related to a normal symbol. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20, a "normal symbol hit determination process" is performed, a process of determining the normal symbol, a process of determining the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the like are performed. Then, when the processing related to the normal symbol in one interrupt cycle is completed, the processing shifts to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs a process related to the payout of the game ball. For example, when a winning game ball is detected in the input SW detection process in step S102, a command transmission area is used to transmit a payout command signal to the payout control board 300 in order to pay out the corresponding prize ball. The payout command signal is set in, and the payout completion signal is received from the payout control board 300. Then, when the process related to the payout of the game ball in one interrupt cycle is completed, the process shifts to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting various commands to the effect control board 200. For example, the main CPU 101 confirms whether a command is set in the command transmission area in the process, and if the command is set, the set command is transmitted to the effect control board 200 or the payout control board 300. Send to. Examples of the command transmitted to the effect control board 200 in the process include a command indicating the information of the set value described above, a command set in the flowchart described later, and the like. Further, examples of the command transmitted to the payout control board 300 in the process include the above-mentioned payout command signal and the like. Then, when the command transmission process in one interrupt cycle is completed, the process shifts to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, when the main CPU 101 is a "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the first start port 21, the first special symbol display 27a controls the display of the special symbol (variation display). And confirmation display), and in the case of a "symbol variation game" based on the game ball entering the second starting port 22, display control (variation display and variation display) of the special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 27b. Confirmation display) is performed. In addition, based on the fact that a game ball has entered each start port and that the "symbol variation game" at each start port has ended, the first special symbol hold indicator 27c and the second special symbol hold display 27c and the second special symbol hold. It also controls the display of the display 27d. Then, when the display control of the special symbol in one interrupt cycle is completed, the process shifts to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs display control (variation display and confirmation display) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 27e. Further, the display control of the normal symbol hold indicator 27f is also performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate member 20 and the "normal symbol variation game" is completed. Then, when the display control of the normal symbol is finished, the main control board timer interrupt process of one interrupt cycle is finished.

(About input SW detection processing)
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an input SW detection process performed on the main control board 100 (subroutine in step S102 of the main control board timer interrupt process).

(Step S102-1)
In step S102-1, the main CPU 101 performs a process when the first start port is detected. In this process, when the information that the entry of the game ball is detected is input from the first start port detection SW21a, the game ball of the "3" ball is paid out to the payout control board 300 as the prize ball, as described above. In the process of setting the payout command signal in the command transmission area and the hold storage area of the "design variation game" corresponding to the first start port 21, all the "first storage area" to "fourth storage area" are held. It is determined whether or not it is in the state of being held, and if it is not in the state of being all held, the process of adding "1" to the hold and the random value used for the "special symbol hit judgment process" are acquired and provided in the main RAM 103. In order to increase and display the hold ball image and the like on the image display device 26 when the process of storing in the hold storage area of the "special symbol variation game" or when the hold is added by "1", the command transmission area described above is used. 1 Performs processing such as setting a starting port winning command. Then, when the processing at the time of detecting the first start port is completed, the processing shifts to step S102-2.

(Step S102-2)
In step S102-2, the main CPU 101 performs a process at the time of detecting the second start port. In this process, when the information that the game ball has been detected is input from the second start port detection SW22a, the game ball of the "2" ball is paid out to the payout control board 300 as a prize ball. All the processes from the "first storage area" to the "fourth storage area" in the process of setting the payout command signal in the command transmission area described above and the hold storage area of the "design variation game" corresponding to the second start port 22. It is determined whether or not it is in the held state, and if it is not in the held state, the process of adding "1" to the hold and the random value used for the "special symbol hit judgment process" are acquired and provided in the main RAM 103. In order to increase and display the hold ball image and the like on the image display device 26 when the process of storing in the hold storage area of the "special symbol variation game" or when the hold is added by "1", the above-mentioned command transmission area The process of setting the second start opening winning command to is performed. Then, when the processing at the time of detecting the second start port is completed, the processing shifts to step S102-3.

(Step S102-3)
In step S102-3, when the main CPU 101 inputs information that detects the entry of a game ball from the normal winning opening detection SW23a, the main CPU 101 causes the payout control board 300 to pay out the game ball of "8" balls as a prize ball. , The process of setting the payout command signal in the command transmission area described above is performed. Further, in order to produce an effect corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the ordinary winning opening 23, a process of setting the ordinary winning opening winning command in the above-mentioned command transmission area is performed. Then, when the normal winning opening detection processing is completed, the processing shifts to step S102-4.

(Step S102-4)
In step S102-4, when the main CPU 101 inputs the information that the entry of the game ball is detected from the large winning opening detection SW24a, the main CPU 101 causes the payout control board 300 to pay out the game ball of "10" balls as the prize ball. , The process of setting the payout command signal in the command transmission area described above is performed. Further, in order to notify the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 24 by using the image display device 26 or the like, the large winning opening entry detection signal is set in the above-mentioned command transmission area. The notification using the image display device 26 or the like means, for example, when more than 10 game balls are detected by the large winning opening detection SW24a per round (also referred to as over winning), the image display device 26 indicates that fact. Examples include displaying and notifying by sound from the speaker 10. Then, when the processing at the time of detecting the large winning opening is completed, the processing shifts to step S102-5.

(Step S102-5)
In step S102-5, when the main CPU 101 inputs the information that detects the passage of the game ball from the gate detection SW20a and the number of holds of the "normal symbol variation game" is less than "4", the "normal" Add "1" to the number of holds of the "symbol variation game" to acquire a random number value used for the "ordinary symbol hit determination process" and store it in the hold storage area of the "ordinary symbol variation game" provided in the main RAM 103. .. Further, in order to produce an effect corresponding to the passage of the game ball through the gate member 20, a process of setting a gate passage command in the above-mentioned command transmission area is performed. Then, when the passing gate detection processing is completed, the processing shifts to step S102-6.

(Step S102-6)
In step S102-6, when the main CPU 101 inputs the information that detects the entry of the game ball from the out port detection SW25a, the main CPU 101 performs an effect corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the out port 25. The process of setting the out-port / in-ball command in the command transmission area described above is performed. Then, when the out port detection processing is completed, the processing shifts to step S103 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(About special symbol related processing)
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related process performed on the main control board 100 (subroutine in step S103 of the main control board timer interrupt process).

(Step S103-1)
In step S103-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a flag indicating stopping is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103. For example, when the main CPU 101 starts the fluctuation of the special symbol, the value "1" indicating that the special symbol is being changed is set in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S103-2-13 in FIG. 12, which will be described later), and the special symbol is set. When the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, the value "0" indicating that the symbol is stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S103-4-3 in FIG. 13 described later). After setting the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped, if it is a hit, the value "2" indicating the winning game is set. Then, when the value "0" indicating the stoppage is set, the process shifts to step S103-2, and when the value "0" indicating the stoppage is not set, the process proceeds to step S103-3. To migrate.

(Step S103-2)
In step S103-2, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol change start processing shown in FIG. The process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the special symbol variation start processing is completed, the special symbol-related processing is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S103-3)
In step S103-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a flag indicating that the flag is changing is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, when the value "1" indicating the change is set, the process shifts to step S103-4, and when the value "1" indicating the change is not set, the process proceeds to step S103-5. To migrate.

(Step S103-4)
In step S103-4, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol changing process shown in FIG. The process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the processing during the special symbol change is completed, the special symbol-related processing is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S103-5)
In step S103-5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value "0" indicating that the game is stopped is not set and the value "1" indicating that the game is changing is not set, the winning game It is determined that the value "2" indicating the above is set, and the winning game process shown in FIG. 14 is performed. The process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the winning game process is completed, the special symbol-related process is terminated, and the process shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding processing at the start of special symbol fluctuation)
FIG. 12 is a flowchart (subroutine in step S103-2 of the special symbol-related processing) showing the processing at the start of the special symbol variation performed on the main control board 100.

(Step S103-2-1)
In step S103-2-1, the main CPU 101 has "first storage area" to "fourth storage area" in the hold storage area of the "design variation game" corresponding to the second start port 22 provided in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not the state is not held in any of the above. If the number of holds corresponding to the second start port 22 is not "0", the process shifts to step S103-2-2, and the number of holds corresponding to the second start port 22 is "0". If so, the process proceeds to step S103-2-4.

(Step S103-2-2)
In step S103-2-2, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of holdings of the second starting port 22. Regarding the subtraction, as described in the above-mentioned "About the second starting port 22", after sliding the determination information (random value value) of the "corresponding storage area" to the "fourth storage area", " It corresponds to emptying the storage area of "1". Along with this, the display of the second special symbol hold indicator 27d also changes to a display mode (from "blinking" to "lighting" or from "lighting" to "off") according to the number of holds. Then, when the number of holdings of the second starting port 22 is subtracted by "1", the process shifts to step S103-2-3.

(Step S103-2-3)
In step S103-2-3, the main CPU 101 sets the second start port subtraction command in the command transmission area described above in order to subtract and display the holding ball image and the like on the image display device 26. The effect mode and the notification mode based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when the second start port subtraction command is set, the process shifts to step S103-2-8.

(Step S103-2-4)
In step S103-2-4, the main CPU 101 is provided in the main RAM 103 in the "first storage area" to "fourth storage area" in the hold storage area of the "design variation game" corresponding to the first start port 21. It is determined whether or not the state is not held in any of the above. If the number of holds corresponding to the first start port 21 is not "0", the process shifts to step S103-2-5, and the number of holds corresponding to the first start port 21 is "0". If so, the process proceeds to step S103-2-6.

(Step S103-2-5)
In step S103-2-5, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of holdings of the first starting port 21. Regarding the subtraction, as described in the above-mentioned "About the first starting port 21", after sliding the determination information (random value value) of the "corresponding storage area" to the "fourth storage area", " It corresponds to emptying the storage area of "1". Along with this, the display of the first special symbol hold indicator 27c also changes to a display mode (from "blinking" to "lighting" or from "lighting" to "off") according to the number of holds. Then, when the number of holdings of the first starting port 21 is subtracted by "1", the process shifts to step S103-2-7.

(Step S103-2-6)
In step S103-2-6, the main CPU 101 determines that the player is not playing the game unless the "design variation game" is played for a predetermined time, and sets the model name and the manufacturer name on the image display device 26. In order to display the demo screen to be displayed, set the demo command in the command transmission area described above. The effect mode and the notification mode based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when the demo command is set, the processing at the start of the special symbol change is ended, and the processing shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S103-2-7)
In step S103-2-7, the main CPU 101 sets the first start port subtraction command in the command transmission area described above in order to subtract and display the holding ball image and the like on the image display device 26. The effect mode and the notification mode based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when the first start port subtraction command is set, the process shifts to step S103-2-8.

(Step S103-2-8)
In step S103-2-8, when the main CPU 101 subtracts the second start port hold and performs the process, the main CPU 101 uses the determination information (random value) acquired and stored in the process at the time of detecting the second start port. On the other hand, when the first start port hold is subtracted and the processing is performed, the judgment information (random value) is determined to be a hit by using the judgment information (random value) acquired and stored in the first start port detection process. Determine if it is information (random value). For example, in the special symbol hit detection table in FIG. 5, if the set value is "1", there are "2" hit random numbers and "558" lost random numbers. In the process, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned acquired and stored determination information (random value) corresponds to any of the random values per "2". Then, if it corresponds, it is determined as "hit", and if it corresponds to any one of the random value "558" of the loss, it is determined as "miss". Then, when the hit determination process of the special symbol is completed, the process shifts to step S103-2-9. The following steps S103-2-9 to S103-2-12 are processed based on the determination result (hit or miss) of step S103-2-8.

In performing the special symbol hit determination process, after reading the set value stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11 of FIG. 8, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 5) corresponding to the read set value is read. , The special symbol hit determination process may be performed, or after the set value is stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11 of FIG. 8, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 5) corresponding to the stored set value is mainly used. In the special symbol hit determination process stored in the RAM 103, the special symbol hit determination process may be performed using the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 5) stored in the main RAM 103.

(Step S103-2-9)
In step S103-2-9, the main CPU 101 determines a special symbol to be confirmed and displayed as a determination result of the "special symbol hit determination process" on the first special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b. For example, when the special symbol hit determination process is performed by subtracting the second start port hold and the determination is made as a hit, the table for (2) the second start port 22 in FIG. 6 and the above-mentioned random number for determining the special symbol are used. The special symbol is determined using and, the first start port hold is subtracted, and the special symbol hit determination process is performed. The special symbol is determined by using the above-mentioned random number for determining the special symbol. Also, when it is determined that there is a loss, a special symbol for the loss is determined in the same manner. Then, when the special symbol is determined, the process shifts to step S103-2-10.

(Step S103-2-10)
In step S103-2-10, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol in the "symbol variation game". For example, when it is determined that the game is lost in the "normal game state", one of the fluctuation patterns from "variation pattern 1" to "variation pattern 5" is determined, and it is determined that the game is a hit in the "normal game state". In that case, one of the fluctuation patterns from "variation pattern 6" to "variation pattern 11" is determined, and if it is determined that there is a loss in the "time saving game state" or the "probability variation game state", the "variation pattern 12" is determined. If any of the fluctuation patterns is determined from the "variation pattern 15" and it is determined to be a hit in the "time saving game state" or the "probability variation game state", the "variation pattern 16" to "variation pattern 17" Determine one of the fluctuation patterns from among. Then, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the process shifts to step S103-2-11.

(Step S103-2-11)
In step S103-2-11, the main CPU 101 sets the command indicating the special symbol determined in step S103-2-9 in the command transmission area described above in order to transmit the command to the effect control board 200. For example, when "special symbol A" is determined in step S103-2-9, a symbol designation command indicating "special symbol A" is transmitted. The processing based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) and the like will be described later. Then, when the symbol designation command is set, the process shifts to step S103-2-12.

(Step S103-2-12)
In step S103-2-12, the main CPU 101 sets the command indicating the special symbol variation pattern determined in step S103-2-10 in the command transmission area described above in order to transmit the command to the effect control board 200. .. For example, when the "fluctuation pattern 9" is determined in step S103-2-10, a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating the "variation pattern 9" is transmitted. The processing based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) and the like will be described later. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is set, the process shifts to step S103-2-13.

(Step S103-2-13)
In step S103-2-13, the main CPU 101 sets a value "1" indicating that the flag is changing in the special symbol state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103. This makes it possible to recognize that the special symbol is changing. Further, although not shown, in the process, a timer related to the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern is set in the main RAM 103, and counting is started. Then, when the value "1" indicating that the special symbol is changing is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the processing at the start of the special symbol change is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

As shown in the above description of FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, if the second starting port 22 is held in step S103-2-1, the special symbol collision determination process takes precedence over the first starting port 21. Was made to execute. This is because, as described above, it is advantageous for the player that the hit game is given based on the ball entering the second starting port 22, and the player is not disadvantaged. Consideration. In the present embodiment, the second starting port 22 is given priority, but the special symbol hit determination process is executed in the order of entering the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22. You may do so.

Further, in FIG. 12 above, only the determination of "hit" or "missing" is performed, but when it is determined that it is not "hit", is it a "small hit" different from the hit game? You may make a judgment as to whether or not. Then, if it is determined that it is a "small hit", a "small hit game" is given, and the large winning opening 24 is controlled by an opening / closing mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than the "win game" and the number of times of opening. It may be.

(About processing during special symbol change)
FIG. 13 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S103-4 of the special symbol-related process) showing the process during the special symbol change performed on the main control board 100.

(Step S103-4-1)
In step S103-4-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the timer related to the fluctuation time set in the main RAM 103 described above has elapsed. For example, when the "variation pattern 8" is determined and the timer is set to "50S", it is determined whether or not "50S" has elapsed. For the convenience of transmitting the symbol stop command described later to the effect control board 200, the timing of determining that the timer has elapsed may be advanced. For example, in the case of "fluctuation pattern 8", the time when "49S" has elapsed may be the timing for determining that the timer has elapsed. In this way, there is a significant difference between the timing at which the special symbol is confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b and the timing at which the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed on the image display device 26. Can be prevented. Then, when the change time of the special symbol has elapsed, the process shifts to step S103-4-2, and when the change time of the special symbol has not elapsed, the process during the change of the special symbol is terminated and the main control is performed. The process shifts to step S104 of the board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-4-2)
In step S103-4-2, the main CPU 101 uses the command transmission area described above to transmit a symbol stop command for stopping the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the image display device 26 to the effect control board 200. Set to. The processing based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) and the like will be described later. Then, when the symbol stop command is set, the process shifts to step S103-4-3.

(Step S103-4-3)
In steps S103-4-3, the main CPU 101 sets a value "0" indicating that the system is stopped in the special symbol state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103. As a result, it can be recognized that the special symbol is stopped. Then, when the value “0” indicating that the system is stopped is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process shifts to step S103-4-4.

(Step S103-4-4)
In steps S103-4-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a value is set in the time reduction counter provided in the main RAM 103. The value of the time reduction counter is set in step S103-5-21 of the winning game process (see FIG. 14) described later. Then, when the value is set in the time reduction counter, the process shifts to step S103-4-5, and when the value is not set in the time reduction counter, the process shifts to step S103-4-9. do.

(Step S103-4-5)
In step S103-4-5, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value of the time reduction counter (subtracts "1"). Then, when the value of the time reduction counter is subtracted (“1” is subtracted), the process shifts to step S103-4-6.

(Step S103-4-6)
In step S103-4-6, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0". Then, when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0", the process shifts to step S103-4-7, and when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is not "0", step S103- The process shifts to 4-9.

(Step S103-4-7)
In step S103-4-7, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the normal gaming state. For example, in the main RAM 103, when the game state storage area is provided and it is in the normal game state, "0" is stored, in the case of the time-saving game state, "1" is stored, and in the probabilistic game state. Is stored in "2". Therefore, in the process, "0" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when "0" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process shifts to step S103-4-8.

(Step S103-4-8)
In steps S103-4-8, the main CPU 101 is set in the above-mentioned command transmission area in order to transmit a game state command indicating that the game is in the normal game state to the effect control board 200. The processing, effect mode, notification mode, etc. based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when a game state command indicating that the game is in the normal game state is set, the process shifts to step S103-4-9.

(Step S103-4-9)
In step S103-4-9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the "special symbol hit determination process" in step S103-2-8 of FIG. 12 is "hit". If the determination result of the "special symbol hit determination process" is "hit", the process shifts to step S103-4-10, and if the determination result of the "special symbol hit determination process" is not "hit", it is special. The process during symbol change is terminated, and the process shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-4-10)
In steps S103-4-10, the main CPU 101 sets a value "2" indicating a winning game in the special symbol state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the special symbol is stopped and that it is a winning game. Then, when the value "2" indicating the winning game is set in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process shifts to step S103-4-11.

(Step S103-4-11)
In step S103-4-11, the main CPU 101 shifts to the opening that notifies that the winning game has started. For example, in the hit game in-game state storage area provided in the main RAM 103, the state in the hit game is stored, and if it is the opening, "0" is set, and if the big winning opening 24 is open. "1" is set, "2" is set for the inter-round interval, and "3" is set for the ending. Then, when "0" indicating the opening is set in the winning game in-game state storage area, the process shifts to step S103-4-12.

(Step S103-4-12)
In steps S103-4-12, the main CPU 101 is set in the above-mentioned command transmission area in order to transmit the opening command for executing the effect corresponding to the opening of the winning game to the effect control board 200. The effect mode, notification mode, etc. based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when the opening command is set, the process shifts to step S103-4-13.

(Step S103-4-13)
In steps S103-4-13, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the opening of the winning game (for example, "10S") in the counter of the main RAM 103. Then, when the time corresponding to the opening is set, the processing during the special symbol change is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(About winning game processing)
FIG. 14 is a flowchart (subroutine of step S103-5 of special symbol-related processing) showing a winning game process performed on the main control board 100.

(Step S103-5-1)
In step S103-5-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening is in progress. It is determined whether or not "0" indicating the opening is set in the hit game in-game state storage area provided in the main RAM 103 described above. When the big winning opening is opened in step S103-5-3 described later, the value of the winning game state storage area changes from "0" to "1". Then, if it is in the opening, the process shifts to step S103-5-2, and if it is not in the opening, the process shifts to step S103-5-5.

(Step S103-5-2)
In step S103-5-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time corresponding to the opening set in step S103-4-13 of FIG. 13 described above (for example, "10S") has elapsed. Then, when the time corresponding to the opening has elapsed, the process shifts to step S103-5-3, and when the time corresponding to the opening has not elapsed, the winning game process is terminated and the main control is performed. The process shifts to step S104 of the board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-3)
In step S103-5-3, the main CPU 101 drives the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 24b to open the large winning opening 24. As a result, the first round of the winning game will start. In this process, the value of the winning game state storage area is changed from "0" to "1". Then, when the large winning opening 24 is opened, the process shifts to step S103-5-4. The main CPU 101 drives and controls the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 24b based on the number of granting rounds specified for the special symbol determined in the special symbol determination process. For example, when "special symbol A" is determined, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 24b is driven and controlled for "10" rounds, and when "special symbol B" is determined, the large winning opening is opened for "5" rounds. The open / close solenoid 24b is driven and controlled.

(Step S103-5-4)
In steps S103-5-4, the main CPU 101 is set in the command transmission area described above in order to transmit a round command for executing the effect corresponding to the winning game round to the effect control board 200. The effect mode, notification mode, etc. based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when the round command is set, the winning game process is ended, and the process shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-5)
In step S103-5-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the large winning opening is open. In the hit game in-game state storage area provided in the main RAM 103 described above, it is determined whether or not "1" indicating that the big winning opening is open is set. Then, if the large winning opening is open, the process shifts to step S103-5-6, and if the large winning opening is not open, the process shifts to step S103-5-9.

(Step S103-5-6)
In step S103-5-6, the main CPU 101 has passed 29.5S with the large winning opening 24 open without detecting the entry of 10 balls by the large winning opening detection SW24a, or has detected the large winning opening. It is determined whether or not 10 balls have been detected by SW24a, and whether or not any of the conditions for closing the large winning opening has been satisfied. Then, when the large winning opening closing condition is satisfied, the process shifts to step S103-5-7, and when the large winning opening closing condition is not satisfied, the winning game process is terminated and the main control board timer The process shifts to step S104 of the interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-7)
In step S103-5-7, the main CPU 101 shifts to the inter-round interval constituting the period from the closing of the large winning opening 24 to the next opening. In this process, the value of the winning game state storage area is set from "1" to "2". Then, when "2" indicating the interval between rounds is set in the winning game in-game state storage area, the process shifts to step S103-5-8.

(Step S103-5-8)
In steps S103-5-8, the main CPU 101 is set in the command transmission area described above in order to transmit the inter-round interval command for executing the effect corresponding to the inter-round interval to the effect control board 200. The effect mode, notification mode, etc. based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when the interval command between rounds is set, the winning game process is ended, and the process shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-9)
In step S103-5-9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the interval between rounds is in progress. It is determined whether or not "2" indicating the interval between rounds is set in the hit game in-game state storage area provided in the main RAM 103 described above. Then, if it is in the inter-round interval, the process shifts to step S103-5-10, and if it is not in the inter-round interval, the process shifts to step S103-5-16.

(Step S103-5-10)
In step S103-5-10, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the end of the final round. For example, if the number of rounds is updated (incremented or decremented) in step S103-5-13 described later and the number of remaining rounds is "0", it is determined that the final round has ended in the process. Then, if it is the end of the final round, the process shifts to step S103-5-11, and if it is not the end of the final round, the process shifts to step S103-5-13.

(Step S103-5-11)
In step S103-5-11, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending that notifies that the winning game has ended. In this process, the value of the winning game state storage area is set to "2" to "3". Further, the time corresponding to the ending of the winning game (for example, "10S") is set in the counter of the main RAM 103. Then, when "3" indicating the ending is set in the hit game in-game state storage area, the process shifts to step S103-5-12.

(Step S103-5-12)
In steps S103-5-12, the main CPU 101 is set in the above-mentioned command transmission area in order to transmit an ending command for executing an effect corresponding to the ending of the winning game to the effect control board 200. The effect mode, notification mode, etc. based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when the ending command is set, the winning game process is ended, and the process shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-13)
In step S103-5-13, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the round number counter of the main RAM 103. The update method may be increment or decrement. For example, when "per 10 rounds" is given, "10" may be set in the round number counter of the main RAM 103 so that one decrement is performed for each round digested, or the number of rounds of the main RAM 103 may be decremented. Instead of setting "10" in the counter, it may be incremented by 1 for each round. Then, when the number of rounds is updated, the process shifts to step S103-5-14.

(Step S103-5-14)
In steps S103-5-14, the main CPU 101 drives the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 24b to open the large winning opening 24. In this process, the value of the winning game state storage area is changed from "2" to "1". Then, when the large winning opening 24 is opened, the process shifts to step S103-5-15.

(Step S103-5-15)
In steps S103-5-15, the main CPU 101 is set in the command transmission area described above in order to transmit a round command for executing the effect corresponding to the winning game round to the effect control board 200. Then, when the round command is set, the winning game process is ended, and the process shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-16)
In step S103-5-16, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time corresponding to the ending set in step S103-5-11 described above (for example, "10S") has elapsed. Then, when the time corresponding to the ending has elapsed, the process shifts to step S103-5-17, and when the time corresponding to the ending has not elapsed, the winning game process is terminated and the main control is performed. The process shifts to step S104 of the board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-17)
In steps S103-5-17, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is any one of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E". That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol determined in the above-mentioned "special symbol determination process" is any of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E". Then, when the special symbol is any of "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and "special symbol E", the process shifts to step S103-5-18, and the special symbol is "special symbol A". , "Special symbol B" or "special symbol E", the process proceeds to step S103-5-20.

(Step S103-5-18)
In steps S103-5-18, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state. Therefore, in the process, "2" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when "2" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process shifts to step S103-5-19. In the present embodiment, the number of times is set to the infinite probability variation game state until the next winning game is given, but the probability variation game state may be set to a finite number. For example, "10000" times may be set as the upper limit of the probabilistic gaming state.

(Step S103-5-19)
In steps S103-5-19, the main CPU 101 is set in the command transmission area described above in order to transmit a game state command indicating that the game is in the probabilistic game state to the effect control board 200. The processing, effect mode, notification mode, etc. based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when a game state command indicating that the probabilistic game state is set is set, the winning game process is ended, and the process shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-5-20)
In steps S103-5-20, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the process, "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process shifts to step S103-5-21.

(Step S103-5-21)
In step S103-5-21, the main CPU 101 sets "100" in the time reduction counter provided in the main RAM 103. As a result, the time-saving game state of "100" times starts from the next fluctuation. Then, when "100" is set in the time reduction counter provided in the main RAM 103, the process shifts to step S103-5-22.

(Step S103-5-22)
In steps S103-5-22, the main CPU 101 is set in the command transmission area described above in order to transmit a game state command indicating that the game is in the time saving game state to the effect control board 200. The processing, effect mode, notification mode, etc. based on the reception of the command (by the effect control board 200) will be described later. Then, when a game state command indicating that the time-saving game state is set is set, the winning game process is ended, and the process shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding the control process performed by the sub CPU 201)
The control process performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. The control program shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 and 16 is stored in the sub ROM 202, and the sub CPU 201 reads the control program from the sub ROM 202 and performs control processing according to the read control program.

(About the main processing of the production control board)
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the main processing performed on the effect control board 200. This process is started by the sub CPU 201 of the effect control board 200 when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a voltage is supplied to each control board from the power supply board 400.

(Step S200)
In step S200, the sub CPU 201 performs an initial setting process for initializing the values of registers provided inside. Then, when the initial setting process is completed, the process shifts to step S201.

(Step S201)
In step S201, the sub CPU 201 prohibits the interruption of the effect control board timer interrupt process, which is executed by periodically interrupting the effect control board main process. Then, when the interrupt is disabled, the process shifts to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the sub CPU 201 updates the effect random number. Then, when the effect random number update process is completed, the process shifts to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the sub CPU 201 permits an interrupt of the effect control board timer interrupt process that is executed by periodically interrupting the effect control board main process. Then, when the interrupt is permitted, the process shifts to step S201 again, and thereafter, steps S201 to S203 are looped.

(About effect control board timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an effect control board timer interrupt process performed on the effect control board 200. This process is a process that is executed by periodically interrupting the above-mentioned effect control board main process.

(Step S300)
In step S300, the sub CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area. Then, when the contents of the register in one interrupt cycle are saved in the stack area, the process shifts to step S301.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 201 performs the main command reception process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect corresponding to the received main command. Although omitted in the flowchart, it will be described in detail later in the explanation section "When a XX command is received". Then, when the main command reception process in one interrupt cycle is completed, the process shifts to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 201 performs an input process of the operating device. For example, when the effect button 14 is operated, the operation information is input from the effect button detection SW14a, and when the effect lever 15 is operated, the operation information is input from the effect lever detection SW15a and the cross key button 16 is operated. If so, the operation information is input from the cross key detection SW16a. When the sub CPU 201 inputs these operation information, the sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26, the speaker 10, and the like to execute the effect. For example, when the operation information is input from the effect button detection SW14a, the character image is displayed on the image display device 26, and the voice effect based on the character image is output from the speaker 10. Then, when the input processing of the operating device in one interrupt cycle is completed, the processing shifts to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 201 performs each game state-specific process. In each of the game state-specific processes, an effect suggesting the setting value described later is performed according to whether the game is "in variable or short", "in non-variable or short", or "winning game". Processing and the like are performed. For example, when the current gaming state is the "probability variable gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state" (that is, "during the shortening"), the processing shown in FIGS. 30 to 32 is performed, and the current gaming state is ". In the case of the "normal gaming state" (that is, "non-variable short and medium"), the processes shown in FIGS. 22 to 24 are performed, and the current gaming state is the "winning gaming state" (that is, "winning gaming"). In the case of, the processing shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is performed. The details of each will be described later. Then, when the processing for each game state in one interrupt cycle is completed, the processing shifts to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect content determined in steps S301 to S303 in each effect device (for example, the light emitting device 9, the speaker 10, the image display device 26, the panel drive device 30, etc.). As a result, the execution information and the like are output and controlled. As a result, in each effect device, an effect corresponding to the effect symbol variation pattern described later, an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 14 and the effect lever 15, and a suggestion effect of the set value described later are executed. It will be. Then, when the process of controlling the output to each effect device in one interrupt cycle is completed, the process shifts to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 201 restores the contents saved in the stack area in step S300 to the register. Then, when the contents saved in the stack area in one interrupt cycle are returned to the register, the effect control board timer interrupt processing in one interrupt cycle ends.

Here, in the main command reception process of step S301 described above, when the main command is received, the main process and the like performed by the sub CPU 201 for each received command will be described. In addition, the following commands include commands whose description is omitted in the flowchart performed by the main CPU 101 described above. There are commands other than the commands shown below, but for convenience, some commands are omitted.

(When a frame release command is received)
The frame opening command (not shown) is not limited to the case where the frame opening detection SW3a is not ON (open state) in step S3 of FIG. 8 or step S3 of FIG. This command is transmitted when the frame open detection SW3a is not ON (open state) in the turned-on state, and upon receiving the command, the sub CPU 201 is notified by the speaker 10 that the door is open. A light emitting pattern indicating that the frame is open to the light emitting device 9 by controlling the image display device 26 to display an image such as "the door is open". It is controlled to emit light with. As a result, when the middle frame 3 or the like is opened against the will of the game clerk, it is possible to easily notice that the middle frame 3 or the like is being opened illegally.

(When an error command is received)
The error command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the error setting process is performed in step S4 of FIG. 8, and upon receiving the command, the sub CPU 201 "detects an error" from the speaker 10. It is controlled to output a voice such as "Fraud", the image display device 26 is controlled to display an image such as "Fraud detected", and the light emitting device 9 emits light with a light emitting pattern indicating that fraud is being detected. Control to let. As a result, when the set value is to be changed against the will of the game clerk, it is possible to easily notice that the set value is changed illegally. The error command is not limited to this. For example, when the magnetic sensor provided on the game board 6 detects an abnormal magnetism, an error command for notifying the magnetic abnormality, or when the radio wave sensor provided on the game board 6 detects an abnormal radio wave. , Error commands for notifying radio anomalies, etc. Further, as an error command that is minor than these errors, when the game ball is not pulled out from the lower saucer 5b even though the game ball is paid out in the winning game, the game ball is pulled out from the lower saucer 5b. An error command to give a notification to urge you to hit left, or an error command to give a notification to hit left when you are hitting right when you shift to the normal game state after the end of the time-saving game state. And so on.

(When an initialization command is received)
The initialization command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the main RAM 103 is initialized in steps S6 and S7 of FIG. 8, and upon receiving the command, the sub CPU 201 is on the effect control board 200 side. Initialize the state managed by. For example, in the probabilistic gaming state, the image display device 26 displays a dedicated background image or the like in the probabilistic gaming state, but when the command is received in the probabilistic gaming state, the image display device 26 says "initializing". The image is displayed, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, a dedicated background image or the like in the normal gaming state is displayed. Further, in the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d, the initial result (for example, "123") is displayed (the command is received in the time saving game state). If you do, the flow will be the same). Further, when the command is received in the normal game state, the image display device 26 similarly displays an image such as "initializing", and after a lapse of a predetermined time, again displays a dedicated background image or the like in the normal game state. indicate. Further, in the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d, an initial result (for example, "123") is displayed.

(When the "command changing the setting value in Fig. 8" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the speaker 10 to output a sound such as "setting is being changed", controls the image display device 26 to display an image such as "setting is being changed", and causes the light emitting device 9 to display an image such as "setting is being changed". It is controlled to emit light with a light emission pattern indicating that the setting is being changed. As a result, the game clerk can grasp that the set value is currently being changed.

(When the "setting value information command in Fig. 8" is received)
The sub CPU 201 stores the set value indicated by the set value information command in the sub RAM 203. For example, when the set value "1" is set in the main control board, the set value information command related to the set value "1" is transmitted, and the effect control board 200 that receives this is set by the main control board 100. Recognizing that the value "1" has been set, the set value "1" is stored in the sub RAM 203. As a result, on the effect control board 200, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting the set value set on the main control board 100 by using the image display device 26 or the like. When the set value information command is received, the effect corresponding to the command reception via the light emitting device 9, the speaker 10, the image display device 26, etc. is not performed, but the set value is stored in the sub RAM 203. It may be notified. For example, the light emitting device 9 may emit light according to each set value to notify that the set value is stored in the sub RAM 203, or the speaker 10 may "store the set value". The sound may be output to notify that the set value is stored in the sub RAM 203, or the image display device 26 displays the set value stored in the sub RAM 203 to set the set value in the sub RAM 203. It may be notified that the value is stored.

(When the 1st start opening winning command is received)
The first start opening winning command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 21 is detected in step S102-1 of FIG. 10, and is a command of the command. Upon reception, the sub CPU 201 may display a first starting port holding ball image (first starting port first holding ball image display area 26g to first starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26j) displayed on the image display device 26, or a first 1 Start port Hold number The image 26e is increased and displayed. In addition, when performing the look-ahead effect described later, the pre-judgment command (not shown) is transmitted separately from the first start opening winning command in step S102-1 of FIG. Based on the command, the first starting port holding ball image (first starting port first holding ball image display area 26g to the first starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26j) displayed on the image display device 26 is usually displayed. It is displayed as a changed holding ball image from the holding ball image of, or a sound effect indicating that the changed holding ball image is displayed is output from the speaker 10.

(When the 2nd start opening winning command is received)
The second starting opening winning command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 22 is detected in step S102-2 of FIG. 10, and is a command of the command. Upon reception, the sub CPU 201 may display a second starting port holding ball image (second starting port first holding ball image display area 26k to second starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26n) displayed on the image display device 26, or a second 2 The starting port reserved number image 26f is increased and displayed. In addition, when performing the look-ahead effect described later, the pre-judgment command (not shown) is transmitted separately from the second start opening winning command in step S102-2 of FIG. Based on the command, the second starting port holding ball image (second starting port first holding ball image display area 26k to the second starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26n) displayed on the image display device 26 is usually displayed. It is displayed as a changed holding ball image from the holding ball image of, or a sound effect indicating that the changed holding ball image is displayed is output from the speaker 10.

(When a normal winning opening winning command is received)
The normal winning opening winning command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the entry of a game ball into the normal winning opening 23 is detected in step S102-3 of FIG. 10, and upon receiving the command. The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display an image for notifying the entry of a ball, and controls the speaker 10 to output a notification sound for notifying that a prize has occurred in the normal winning opening 23.

(When a big prize opening prize command is received)
The large winning opening winning command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 24 is detected in step S102-4 of FIG. 10, and upon receipt of the command. The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display the number of prize balls acquired in the winning game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of times of receiving the large winning opening winning command per round, which is counted by the sub CPU 201, exceeds "10" (when the above-mentioned "over winning" occurs), the speaker 10 Therefore, control is performed to output a notification sound for notifying that an over-winning has occurred. In addition, in the sub RAM 203, between the transition to the "probability variable gaming state" and the transition to the "normal gaming state", including the pullback of the "short-time gaming state", a prize is awarded to the grand prize opening winning command. Count and store the number. That is, the sub RAM 203 is provided with a large winning opening winning number counter, and the counter is used when the game shifts to the winning game in the “probability variation game state” and when the counter shifts to the winning game in the “time saving game state”. Is added for each entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 24 during the winning game, and is cleared when the state shifts to the "normal game state". Then, the sub CPU 201 can calculate the number of prize balls won in the continuous winning game from the value of the counter and the prize balls "10" of the large winning opening 24.

(When a gate pass command is received)
The gate passage command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the passage of the game ball to the gate member 20 is detected in step S102-5 of FIG. 10, and upon receiving the command, the sub CPU 201 receives the command. The image display device 26 controls to display an image for notifying the passage, and controls to output a notification sound for notifying that the passage to the gate member 20 has occurred from the speaker 10.

(When an out-door entry command is received)
The out-port entry command (not shown) is a command transmitted when the entry of a game ball into the out-port 25 is detected in step S102-6 of FIG. 10, and is a sub command upon receiving the command. The CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the out-port / in-ball counter provided in the sub RAM 203. As a result, the number of game balls that have entered the out port 25 can be grasped on the effect control board 200 side.

(When the "first start port subtraction command in FIG. 12" is received)
The sub CPU 201 updates (subtracts) the storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. As a result, the first starting port holding ball image (first starting port first holding ball image display area 26g to the first starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26j) displayed on the image display device 26 and the first starting port The reserved number image 26e is subtracted and displayed. When the look-ahead effect is executed, the already changed holding ball image is displayed as a further changed holding ball image, or the held ball image further changed is displayed from the speaker 10 along with the subtraction display. Outputs a sound effect indicating that it has been displayed.

(When the "second start port subtraction command in FIG. 12" is received)
The sub CPU 201 updates (subtracts) the storage area provided in the sub RAM 203 based on the reception of the second start port subtraction command. As a result, the second starting port holding ball image (second starting port first holding ball image display area 26k to the second starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26n) displayed on the image display device 26 and the second starting port are displayed. The reserved number image 26f is subtracted and displayed. When the look-ahead effect is executed, the already changed holding ball image is displayed as a further changed holding ball image, or the held ball image further changed is displayed from the speaker 10 along with the subtraction display. Outputs a sound effect indicating that it has been displayed.

(When "Demo command in Fig. 12" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display a model name or a maker name, which is a display indicating that the game is not being played, or controls to display a immersive prevention image that encourages the image display device 26 to prevent excessive immersiveness in the game. Control is performed so that the light emitting device 9 emits light in the light emitting pattern in the demonstration.

(When the "symbol specification command of FIG. 12" is received)
The sub CPU 201 determines the combination of the symbols of the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d. For example, when "special symbol A" is specified as the symbol designation command, "777" is determined in order to confirm and display "777" as a combination of the symbols for the final display of the decorative symbol. When "special symbol B" is specified as the symbol designation command, any symbol combination is determined from the symbol combinations of "111", "333", and "555". When "special symbol C" is specified, any combination of symbols is determined from the combinations of symbols "222", "444", "666", and "888". When "special symbol D" is specified, for example, "765" or the like is determined. The "special symbol E", "special symbol F", and "special symbol G" are also determined in the same manner. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game state after the winning game is the "probability changing game state" from the combination of the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the "special symbol B" and "special symbol C" are not limited to this. When is specified, one of the symbol combinations is determined from the symbol combinations of "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", and "888". When the combination of decorative symbols is displayed, it is not possible to know whether or not the game state after the hit game is the "probability change game state", and the game state after the hit game is displayed during the hit game or at the ending of the hit game. May be notified whether or not is in the "probability changing game state".

In addition, the sub CPU 201 specifies a winning symbol in the sub RAM 203, including pulling back the "time saving game state" from the transition to the "probability variation game state" to the transition to the "normal game state". By receiving the command, the number of consecutive transitions to the winning game is counted and stored. That is, the sub RAM 203 is provided with a continuous hit count counter, and the counter is added when the game shifts to the winning game in the “probability variation game state” and when the game shifts to the winning game in the “time saving game state”. It is cleared when it shifts to the "normal game state". As a result, on the effect control board 200 side, the number of times of continuous transition to the winning game can be counted and stored. Further, the sub RAM 203 is provided with a counter for the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds in addition to the above counter, and the sub CPU 201 receives a symbol designation command indicating any of "special symbols A, C, E, F". Then, the number-of-times counter per 10 consecutive rounds is added, and the game is cleared when the player shifts to the "normal game state" or when a symbol designation command indicating "special symbol B" is received. As a result, on the effect control board 200 side, the number of consecutive transitions to the game per 10 rounds can be counted and stored.

(When the "special symbol fluctuation pattern specification command of FIG. 12" is received)
The sub CPU 201 determines the effect symbol variation pattern. Here, the "effect symbol variation pattern" is configured as shown in FIG. 18, and for example, when a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating the "variation pattern 9" is received, the "pseudo-ream 3 super reach" is received. In order to determine the content of the "pseudo-ren", the content of the "super reach", the advance notice effect to be executed, etc., one of the "directed symbol variation pattern 19" to "directed symbol variation pattern 21" is determined. .. That is, in the special symbol variation pattern designation command, the outline (variation time, etc.) of "pseudo-ream 3 super reach" is determined, and in the effect symbol variation pattern, more detailed effect content is determined. As shown in FIG. 18, the "effect symbol variation pattern" is one in which one effect symbol variation pattern is defined for one variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) (for example, "variation pattern 1"). And "effect symbol variation pattern 1") and one variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) in which two or more effect symbol variation patterns are defined (for example, "effect pattern 2" and "effect symbol variation"). "Pattern 2" and "Direction symbol variation pattern 3") exist. As a result, the number of special symbol variation patterns stored in the main ROM 102 can be suppressed to contribute to the reduction of the capacity of the main control board 100, and even if the number of special symbol variation patterns is suppressed, among a plurality of effect symbol variation patterns. Since any of the effect symbol variation patterns can be determined from, it is possible to enrich the effects for one special symbol variation pattern. The effect symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 18 is stored in the sub ROM 202.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19, each effect symbol variation pattern defines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. FIG. 19 shows an executable notice “○” and an unexecutable notice “×” for each effect symbol variation pattern. For example, “effect symbol variation pattern 2” is a “mini character advance notice”. , "Direction button notice" and "look-ahead notice" can be executed, and other notices cannot be executed. Although it is described as feasible and infeasible in FIG. 19, when the effect symbol variation pattern is determined, the advance notice effect may be uniquely determined. For example, when the "effect symbol variation pattern 2" is determined, the "mini character notice", the "effect button notice", and the "look-ahead notice" may be executed. Further, as another method, when the effect symbol variation pattern is determined, an execution lottery for whether or not to execute may be performed in a feasible notice, and only the winning notice effect may be executed. For example, when the "directed pattern fluctuation pattern 2" is determined, an execution lottery is performed for the "mini character notice", the "directed button notice", and the "look-ahead notice", and of these, the "directed button notice" If only the execution lottery is won, only the "directing button notice" needs to be executed.

The outline of each notice effect shown in FIG. 19 is as follows. The "mini character notice" is a notice given before the formation of the reach, and is a notice that the reach will be developed or a winning game will be given depending on the number and types of mini characters displayed on the image display device 26. It is a production to do. The "effect button notice" is a notice given before the formation of the reach, and the effect button 14 can be pressed, and an image prompting the press of the effect button 14 is displayed on the image display device 26 to display the effect button. When 14 is pressed, for example, the character image and the dialogue notice that the character image refers to the dialogue are executed, and depending on the type of the character image and the type of dialogue, the reach is developed and the winning game is given. It is a production that gives notice. The "directing lever notice" is a notice given before the formation of the reach or at the timing of deriving the result of the reaching production content, and is a production with a higher degree of expectation for the winning game than the above-mentioned "directing button notice". .. For example, if the "effect lever notice" is executed at the timing when the "effect button notice" before the reach is formed, the expectation for the winning game is high. Further, at the timing of deriving the result of the effect content of the reach, the effect lever 15 can be operated, and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 15 is displayed on the image display device 26 to operate the effect lever 15. For example, the movable body 28 is moved to notify that the reach production content is successful (hit), and if the movable body 28 is not movable, the reach production content is notified to be unsuccessful (missing). It is also possible to perform such effects. The "design action notice" is a notice given at the start of fluctuation, and the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c start to change at the same time, or each starts to change individually. Depending on the situation, it is a production that announces that it will develop into reach and that a winning game will be granted. The "design action notice" is also an effect suggesting a set value (detailed in FIG. 20). The "specific sound notice" is a notice given at the time of temporary stop of fluctuation, and is an effect emitted from the speaker 10 when the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c are temporarily stopped. Depending on the type of sound, it is an effect that suggests that the pseudo-ream continues in the pseudo-ream notice described later, and that the pre-reading effect described later may include a game in holding the subsequent "design variation game". The "specific sound notice" is also an effect suggesting a set value (detailed in FIG. 20). The "movable body notice" is a notice given at the start of fluctuation or during the effect of the reach, and is an effect of notifying that the movable body 28 will develop into a reach or a winning game will be given depending on the operation mode of the movable body 28. Is. The "movable body notice" is also an effect suggesting a set value (detailed in FIG. 20). Compared to other notices, the "group notice" is positioned as the most promising notice for the winning game, and it is easier to select when it is judged as "hit" in the special symbol hit detection process, and "missing". It is a production that is harder to select than when it is judged. For example, when a reach is formed, an image such that a character group image composed of a plurality of characters appears from the right end of the image display device 26 and moves to the left end of the image display device 26 is displayed. Since the hit probability is different for each set value, for example, the "group notice" is more likely to appear in the case of the set value "1" than in the case of the set value "4". As a result, it is possible to add fun that the set value can be estimated from the appearance degree of the "group notice". The "look-ahead notice" will be described later in the "look-ahead effect" section, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, the "notice for exclusive use during change / short time" is a notice that can be executed in the "probability change game state" or the "time reduction game state" and cannot be executed in the "normal game state". And, the "notice for exclusive use during change" is a notice given at the start of the fluctuation, and is a production for notifying the development of reach and the granting of a winning game. The "notice for exclusive use during change" is referred to as "specific notice effect" in the flowchart described later.

(When the "symbol stop command of FIG. 13" is received)
The sub CPU 201 stops the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d that are fluctuating in the image display device 26. Further, when the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth symbol image 26d are stopped, the speaker 10 controls to output the stop sound of the decorative symbol. When the chance eye continuous notice, which will be described later, is executed, control is performed to output a stop sound and display an effect image corresponding to the chance eye continuous notice. Further, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation count counter provided in the sub RAM 203 by receiving the symbol stop command. As a result, the number of fluctuations in the "design variation game" can be counted on the effect control board 200 side. The value of the fluctuation count counter provided in the sub RAM 203 is cleared by receiving the symbol designation command of the winning special symbol (special symbol A, B, C, E, F). However, when counting the cumulative number of fluctuations, it is assumed that the number of fluctuations will be calculated in an area that is not cleared separately.

(When "Game status command (normal) in FIG. 13" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display a background image corresponding to the normal gaming state, and displays the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c as images corresponding to the normal gaming state ( For example, control is performed so that the numerical image is an image in which a character image is attached), or the sound effect corresponding to the background image in the normal gaming state is output from the speaker 10.

(When the "opening command of FIG. 13" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the display of the opening image of the hit game (for example, an image in which the main characters are gathered) on the image display device 26, and outputs the sound effect corresponding to the opening (sound effect such as "big hit") to the speaker 10. Control to output more and control to control the light emitting device 9 with a light emitting pattern (light emitting in rainbow colors) corresponding to the opening. With these effects, it is possible to raise the mood of the player who will play the winning game from now on.

(When "Round command in Fig. 14" is received)
When the sub CPU 201 receives the first round command after receiving the opening command, the sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display an image such as "Round 1", a character image to appear in the first round, and the like, and the first round. The sound effect corresponding to the above is output from the speaker 10, and the light emitting device 9 is controlled to emit light with the light emitting pattern corresponding to the first round. After that, each time the sub CPU 201 receives a round command, it recognizes that it is the second round and the third round (counted by the sub CPU 201), and executes an effect according to each round.

(When the "inter-round interval command in FIG. 14" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display a character image or the like corresponding to the inter-round interval, controls to output a sound effect corresponding to the inter-round interval from the speaker 10, and a light emitting pattern corresponding to the inter-round interval. Controls the light emitting device 9 to emit light.

(When the "ending command of FIG. 14" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls to display the ending image (for example, a main character image) of the winning game on the image display device 26, controls to output the sound effect corresponding to the ending from the speaker 10, and the light emitting pattern corresponding to the ending. Controls the light emitting device 9 to emit light.

(When "Game status command (probability change) in FIG. 14" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display a background image corresponding to the probabilistic gaming state, and displays the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c as images corresponding to the probabilistic gaming state ( For example, control is performed so that only a numerical image is used, and a sound effect corresponding to a background image in a probabilistic game state is output from the speaker 10.

(When "Game status command (time reduction) in FIG. 14" is received)
The sub CPU 201 controls the image display device 26 to display a background image corresponding to the time-saving gaming state, and displays the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c as images corresponding to the time-saving gaming state ( For example, control is performed so that only a numerical image is used, and a sound effect corresponding to a background image in a time-saving game state is output from the speaker 10.

Next, an example of the effect using the image display device 26 and the like will be described. It goes without saying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment may be provided with the following effects, and the gaming states to be executed are also "normal gaming state", "time saving gaming state", and "time saving gaming state". All of the "probability-changing gaming states" may be targeted, "2" may be targeted, or any "1" may be targeted.

(Look-ahead production)
The look-ahead effect is a determination of the pre-judgment process by performing a pre-judgment process prior to the hit determination process in the special symbol change start process at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22. It is a production that is executed based on the result. When the look-ahead effect is not installed, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21, the determination information (random value) is acquired and stored in FIG. 10, and then the special symbol variation of FIG. 12 starts. Since the special symbol hit detection process is performed in the time processing, even if the judgment information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area", until the judgment information (random value) is transferred to the "storage area". , It is not judged whether it is a hit or not. Therefore, even if the judgment information (random value) of "hit" is acquired, the expectation for hit is raised at the stage before the judgment information (random value) is transferred to the "storage area". It is not possible to perform production. However, if the look-ahead effect is installed, for example, in FIG. 10, in the process after acquiring and storing the determination information (random value), the "pre-judgment process" is performed to determine "hit" or "miss". Since it is possible to execute a continuous effect over a plurality of fluctuations (including fluctuations transferred to the storage area) until the determination information (random value) is transferred to the "storage area", the "storage area" It becomes possible to raise the expectation for "hit" from the stage before the judgment information (random value) is transferred to.

As a specific example of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, "hold look-ahead effect" can be mentioned. The "holding look-ahead effect" mainly means the first starting port first holding ball image display area 26g to the first starting port fourth holding ball image display area 26j and the second starting port first holding ball image display area 26k to. This is an effect using a hold ball image displayed in the second start port fourth hold ball image display area 26n. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 when the determination information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area". Pre-judgment processing is performed after storing the numerical value). Then, when it is determined that the hold look-ahead effect is to be performed based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment process, a look-ahead hold ball image different from the normal hold image is displayed in the first start port fourth hold ball image display area 26j. do. As the look-ahead hold ball image, for example, multiple types such as "blinking white", "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" can be displayed in multiple stages, and the pre-judgment process can be performed. When the judgment result is "hit", any of "blinking white", "blue", "green", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" can be displayed, and the judgment result of the pre-judgment process is In the case of "loss", any one of "blinking white", "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" can be displayed. Then, "rainbow" can be selected only in the case of "hit", "red" or "gold" can be easily selected in the case of "hit", and "white blinks" in the case of "miss". "" And "blue" are easier to select, raising expectations for hitting "red" and "gold". In addition, although it is "blinking white" at the time of entering the ball, it changes to a reserved ball image with high expectation such as "blue" and "green" every time "1 variation game" is performed. It is also possible to display "gold" from the time of entering the ball.

Further, as a specific example of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, there is a "zone effect". The "zone effect" is an effect mainly using the image display device 26. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 when the determination information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area". Pre-judgment processing is performed after storing the numerical value). Then, when it is determined that the zone effect is to be performed based on the determination result of the pre-determination process, for example, in the next symbol variation game, in the image display device 26, "If special symbols are aligned, the XX zone is entered!" After performing an effect to incite the rush, the special symbols are aligned and rushed into the "○○ zone", and the judgment information (random value) stored in the above-mentioned "fourth storage area" is the "corresponding storage area". The "○○ zone" effect is executed until the change is transferred to. During the execution of this "XX zone" effect, the image display device 26 displays a telop such as "in the XX zone". Then, the "zone effect" is likely to be executed when it is determined to be "hit" in the pre-judgment process, and is difficult to be executed when it is determined to be "missing". It is possible to have great expectations that the game will be granted.

Further, as a specific example of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect, there is a "chance eye continuous notice". The "chance eye continuous notice" is an effect mainly using the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c displayed on the image display device 26. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting port 21 when the determination information (random value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third storage area", the determination information (random value) is stored in the "fourth storage area". Pre-judgment processing is performed after storing the numerical value). Then, when it is determined that the chance eye continuous effect is to be performed based on the determination result of the pre-determination process, for example, the "design variation game" corresponding to the determination information (random value) stored in the "first storage area". , And the final display of the "design variation game" corresponding to the judgment information (random value) stored in the "second storage area", and the judgment information (random value) stored in the "third storage area". ) And the final display of the "design variation game", the combination of decorative symbol images of the same color is stopped. For example, in the decorative design image, "333" and "777" are composed of red, "111" and "555" are composed of green, and "222" and "444" are used. , "666" and "888" are composed of blue, and the combination of only red such as "337" and "773", the combination of only green such as "115" and "551", and "246" By confirming and displaying a combination of only blue colors such as "" and "628" over a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a hit will be given in the subsequent "design fluctuation game". In the case of "hit", it is easy to select the combination only in red, and in the case of "miss", it is easy to select the combination only in blue, and when the combination only in red is confirmed and displayed. The expectation for winning is increasing.

(Pseudo-ream notice)
The pseudo-ream notice is an effect using the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the pseudo-ream-dedicated symbol mainly displayed on the image display device 26. By repeatedly displaying the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern in "Game of No.", it is an effect that makes it appear as if the fluctuation is performed multiple times. For example, as shown in FIG. 7, the pseudo-ream can be executed "2" times, "3" times, and "4" times, and the higher the number of times, the higher the expectation for "hit". (In this embodiment, "hit" is confirmed "4" times). As a specific effect content, for example, "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol image 26a, "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c, and "pseudo" is displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol image 26b. Temporarily stop and display all the decorative symbol images (for example, "NEXT"), and display all the decorative symbol images in a variable manner (at this point, pseudo-ream "2" times), and again as the left decorative symbol image 26a. "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed, "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c, and "pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (for example," NEXT ")" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol image 26b. Then, all the decorative symbol images are displayed in a variable manner (at this point, the pseudo-ream "3" times, and thereafter, the pseudo-ream "4" times are the same). For example, "2". In the temporary stop display of the second time, when "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol image 26a and "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c, it becomes a pseudo-ream "2" times and "2". In the temporary stop display of the second time, when "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol image 26a and "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol image 26c, it is a pseudo-ream "3" times ( After that, the same applies to the pseudo-ream "4" times). In addition, once the reach is reached, the so-called "pseudo-ream after reach", in which the "pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (for example," NEXT ")" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol image 26b, or, for example, the "1st" time. At the start of the fluctuation after the temporary stop display of, it is announced that the "pseudo-ream dedicated symbol (for example," NEXT ")" will be temporarily stopped and displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol image 26b (design stop notice) at that time. It is also possible to perform an effect in which the pseudo-ream "3" times or more is confirmed.

(RTC production)
The RTC effect is an effect mainly using the image display device 26 and the speaker 10. For example, the effect control board 200 is provided with an RTC (real-time clock) device 204 that outputs date information and time information so that the effect control board 200 can recognize the date information and time information. When a predetermined date is reached, the effect stored in the sub ROM 202 in advance can be selected, or a dedicated effect is performed at a predetermined time. As a dedicated effect, for example, the image display device 26 displays "XX time" or the like, and the speaker 10 outputs a musical piece corresponding to the "XX time". Then, on the image display device 26, a message such as "If a XX notice is given, the winning is confirmed!" Is displayed. That is, when the special effect is being performed, if it is determined to be a hit in the "special symbol collision detection process", "○○ notice" is selected with a high probability, and if it is determined to be a loss, By not selecting "○○ notice", it is possible to make a hit confirmation by the appearance of "○○ notice" while the special effect is being executed.

Next, regarding the effect mode "setting suggestion effect" (suggestion effect suggesting the set value) in which the above-mentioned "set value" set on the main control board 100 side is suggested to the player on the effect control board 200 side. Give an explanation. The "suggestion" is, for example, in the present embodiment, suggesting that the set value is "2" or more (that is, the set value "1" or the set value "2"), and the set value is set high. A value (that is, a setting value "1") suggesting that the setting value is an odd number (that is, a setting value "1" or a setting value "3"), and an even number (that is, a setting value "3") That is, it is assumed that both a deterministic suggestion and an indeterminate (ambiguous) suggestion are included, such as a suggestion that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4"). Further, the definite suggestion does not directly indicate, for example, the set value "1", but indirectly suggests through a character image or the like. Therefore, displaying the character image displayed only when the set value is "1" corresponds to providing a definite suggestion that the set value is "1".

Further, the "setting suggestion effect" is used for both the suggestion of the degree of expectation for the winning game and the suggestion of the set value, as in the "notice effect" shown in FIG. 20 described later (that is, the setting). In addition to suggesting the set value set by the operating means, it suggests the possibility that a special gaming state will be performed), or, for example, dedicated to suggesting only the set value shown in FIG. 25 etc. described later. The character image of the above, for example, a dedicated background image that only suggests a set value, as shown in FIG. 33, which will be described later, corresponds to the image (there is a dedicated image that is also used as a notice effect and a dedicated one that is not used). If the suggestion of the degree of expectation for the winning game and the suggestion of the set value are used together as in the "notice production", for example, the winning game can be expected, the high setting value can be expected, and the winning game cannot be expected. You can expect a lot of variations, such as those that can be expected to have a high setting value, and those that can expect a winning game but cannot expect a high setting value. be able to. In addition, if it is dedicated, it can be made to appear separately from the advance notice production, so that it is possible to further concentrate on the game.

First, as shown in FIG. 17, whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined for each variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern). The part indicated by "○" indicates that the setting suggestion effect can be executed, and the part indicated by "x" indicates that the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. That is, as described above, the "full rotation reach" of the "variation pattern 11" is the most desired reach for the player to play the game, and the degree of appearance is low. When "Rotating Reach" occurs, I want to concentrate on the production that is rarely seen. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion effect is performed in such "full rotation reach", it becomes rather troublesome, and it is not feasible. Further, the "shortening variation" of the "variation pattern 12" has a short variation time of "2S", and even if the setting suggestion effect is performed during this "2S", there is a high possibility that the player will miss it. For this reason, in the "variation pattern 11" and the "variation pattern 12", it is impossible to execute the setting suggestion effect. In this way, by disabling the setting suggestion effect according to the effect content and the variation time in the fluctuation pattern, the above-mentioned annoyance is given, and the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect is overlooked. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Even if the execution lottery for the setting suggestion effect described later is used, if the determined fluctuation pattern is "fluctuation pattern 11" or "fluctuation pattern 12", and if it is "variation pattern 11", the full rotation reach The execution is carried over to the later winning game, and in the case of the "fluctuation pattern 12", the execution is carried over after the next fluctuation. As described above, when the "shortening variation" (2S) is provided in the normal gaming state, the setting suggestion effect may be disabled even in the "shortening variation" (2S) in the normal gaming state.

Next, the relationship between the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. As mentioned above, the "design action notice" and the "movable body notice" play a role as a setting suggestion effect in addition to the role of notifying the development of reach and the granting of a winning game. There is. In addition to the role of suggesting that the pseudo-ream continues and the possibility that the game is included in the subsequent hold, the "specific sound notice" also plays a role of setting suggestion effect. In addition, the above-mentioned look-ahead notice (pending change notice) also plays a role as a setting suggestion effect in addition to the role of notifying that the game will develop into reach and that a winning game will be given.

(Design action notice)
The "design action notice" of FIG. 20 (A) is a notice effect of the above-mentioned contents, and includes "pattern 1" to "pattern 8". For example, "pattern 2" is more than "pattern 1". The expectation for the winning game is different for each pattern, such as the higher the expectation for the winning game when it is executed (for convenience, the larger the number, the higher the expectation for the winning game, but It may be changed as appropriate). Further, the part indicated by "○" indicates that it is feasible, and the part indicated by "x" indicates that it is not feasible. Further, the set value "1" to the set value "4" indicate the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the set value "1" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 5", "Pattern 7", and "Pattern 8" can be executed, and "Pattern 6" cannot be executed. When the set value "2" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 6" and "Pattern 8" can be executed, and "Pattern 7" cannot be executed. When the set value "3" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 5" and "Pattern 7" can be executed, and "Pattern 6" and "Pattern 8" cannot be executed. Further, when the set value "4" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 6" can be executed, and "Pattern 7" and "Pattern 8" cannot be executed. As a result, when "Pattern 6" is executed, it means that the set value "2" is set or the set value "4" is set, and the symbol action notice "Pattern 6" From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4". Similarly, when "Pattern 7" is executed, it means that the set value "1" is set or the set value "3" is set, and the symbol action notice "Pattern 7" From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3". Similarly, when "Pattern 8" is executed, it means that the set value "1" is set or the set value "2" is set, and the symbol action notice "Pattern 8" From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2". In this way, since the symbol action notice plays a role of suggesting a set value in addition to the role as the original notice, it is possible to draw attention to the player as to which symbol action notice is executed. Can be improved. The "design action notice" is not limited to the pattern shown in FIG. 20 (A), and may include other patterns.

(Specific sound notice)
The "specific sound notice" in FIG. 20B is a notice effect of the above-mentioned contents, and includes "pattern 1" to "pattern 5". For example, "pattern 2" is more than "pattern 1". The degree of expectation for the winning game is different for each pattern, such that the execution is more likely to continue the pseudo-ream, and the subsequent hold is more likely to include the game (for convenience). , The larger the number, the higher the expectation for the winning game, but it may be changed as appropriate). Further, the part indicated by "○" indicates that it is feasible, and the part indicated by "x" indicates that it is not feasible. Further, the set value "1" to the set value "4" indicate the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the set value "1" is set, "Pattern 1", "Pattern 2", "Pattern 4", and "Pattern 5" can be executed, and "Pattern 3" cannot be executed. When the set value "2" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 3" and "Pattern 5" can be executed, and "Pattern 4" cannot be executed. When the set value "3" is set, "Pattern 1", "Pattern 2", and "Pattern 4" can be executed, and "Pattern 3" and "Pattern 5" cannot be executed. Further, when the set value "4" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 3" can be executed, and "Pattern 4" and "Pattern 5" cannot be executed. As a result, when "Pattern 3" is executed, it means that the set value "2" is set or the set value "4" is set, and the specific sound warning "Pattern 3" is set. From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4". Similarly, when "Pattern 4" is executed, it means that the set value "1" is set or the set value "3" is set, and the specific sound warning "Pattern 4" is set. From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3". Similarly, when "Pattern 5" is executed, it means that the set value "1" is set or the set value "2" is set, and the specific sound warning "Pattern 5" is set. From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2". In this way, since the specific sound notice plays a role of suggesting a set value in addition to the role of the original notice, it is possible to draw attention to the player as to which specific sound notice is executed. Can be improved. The "specific sound notice" is not limited to the pattern shown in FIG. 20 (B), and may include other patterns.

(Movable body notice)
The "movable body notice" in FIG. 20 (C) is a notice effect of the above-mentioned contents, and includes "pattern 1" to "pattern 5". For example, "pattern 2" is more than "pattern 1". The expectation for the winning game is different for each pattern, such as the higher the expectation for the winning game when it is executed (for convenience, the larger the number, the higher the expectation for the winning game, but It may be changed as appropriate). Further, the part indicated by "○" indicates that it is feasible, and the part indicated by "x" indicates that it is not feasible. Further, the set value "1" to the set value "4" indicate the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the set value "1" is set, "Pattern 1", "Pattern 2", "Pattern 4", and "Pattern 5" can be executed, and "Pattern 3" cannot be executed. When the set value "2" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 3" and "Pattern 5" can be executed, and "Pattern 4" cannot be executed. When the set value "3" is set, "Pattern 1", "Pattern 2", and "Pattern 4" can be executed, and "Pattern 3" and "Pattern 5" cannot be executed. Further, when the set value "4" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 3" can be executed, and "Pattern 4" and "Pattern 5" cannot be executed. As a result, when "Pattern 3" is executed, it means that the set value "2" is set or the set value "4" is set, and the "Pattern 3" of the movable body notice is set. From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4". Similarly, when "Pattern 4" is executed, it means that the set value "1" is set or the set value "3" is set, and the "Pattern 4" of the movable body notice is set. From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3". Similarly, when "Pattern 5" is executed, it means that the set value "1" is set or the set value "2" is set, and the "Pattern 5" of the movable body notice is set. From the execution, it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2". In this way, since the movable body notice plays a role of suggesting a set value in addition to the role as the original notice, it is possible to draw attention to the player as to which movable body notice is executed. Can be improved. The "movable body notice" is not limited to the pattern shown in FIG. 20 (C), and may include other patterns. For example, a plurality of patterns having different operating speeds of the movable body may be provided, and the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect may be performed with these patterns.

(Pre-reading notice_pending change notice)
The “look-ahead notice (pending change notice)” in FIG. 20 (D) is a notice effect of the above-mentioned contents, and includes “pattern 1” to “pattern 9”. The expectation for the winning game is different for each pattern, such that the one in which "Pattern 2" is executed has a higher expectation for the winning game (for convenience, the larger the number, the higher the expectation for the winning game). However, it may be changed as appropriate). Further, the part indicated by "○" indicates that it is feasible, and the part indicated by "x" indicates that it is not feasible. Further, the set value "1" to the set value "4" indicate the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the set value "1" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 6", "Pattern 8", and "Pattern 9" can be executed, and "Pattern 7" cannot be executed. When the set value "2" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 7" and "Pattern 9" can be executed, and "Pattern 8" cannot be executed. When the set value "3" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 6" and "Pattern 8" can be executed, and "Pattern 7" and "Pattern 9" cannot be executed. When the set value "4" is set, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 7" can be executed, and "Pattern 8" and "Pattern 9" cannot be executed. As a result, when "Pattern 7" is executed, it means that the set value "2" is set or the set value "4" is set, and the "Pattern" of the look-ahead notice_hold change notice is set. From the execution of "7", it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4". Similarly, when "Pattern 8" is executed, it means that the set value "1" is set or the set value "3" is set, and the "Pattern" of the look-ahead notice_hold change notice is set. From the execution of "8", it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3". Similarly, when "Pattern 9" is executed, it means that the set value "1" is set or the set value "2" is set, and the "Pattern" of the look-ahead notice_hold change notice is set. From the execution of "9", it can be suggested to the player that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2". In this way, the look-ahead notice (hold change notice) plays a role of suggesting a set value in addition to the role as the original notice, so the player is asked which look-ahead notice (hold change notice) is executed. It can be noticed and the game entertainment can be improved. The "look-ahead notice (pending change notice)" is not limited to the pattern shown in FIG. 20 (D), and may include other patterns.

Next, the setting suggestion effect-related determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The setting suggestion effect related decision table is (A) setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (without loss), (B) setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with loss), (C) setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with loss), It is composed of (D) a decorative symbol determination table for setting suggestion effect, and (E) a dialogue notice (effect button notice) determination table for setting suggestion effect, and these tables are stored in the sub ROM 202.

First, in the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (without loss) shown in FIG. 21 (A), the vertical axis represents the setting value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the horizontal axis represents the setting suggestion effect. Is shown. That is, when the set value "1" is set, there is a probability of "4/256" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2" is not executed. With a probability of "1/256", it is not possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value is "1", and with a probability of "251/256", with a set value of "1" or a set value of "3". It does not correspond to the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that there is, and does not correspond to the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "2" or the setting value is "4". In addition, when the set value "2" is set, there is a probability of "12/256" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2" is not executed. With a probability of "244/256", it is not possible to execute the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "2" or the setting value "4", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1". It does not correspond to the execution, and does not correspond to the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "3". In addition, when the set value "3" is set, there is a probability of "256/256" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3" is not executed. The execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2", the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1", and the execution of the setting suggestion effect. It does not correspond to the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4". In addition, when the set value "4" is set, there is a probability of "256/256" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4" is not executed. The execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2", the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1", and the execution of the setting suggestion effect. It does not correspond to the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3". As described above, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (without loss) shown in FIG. 21A is positioned as a table without loss because it always hits the execution of any of the setting suggestion effects. Further, in the case of the setting value "1", the probability of winning the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is the most advantageous setting value "1" for the player is the execution of another setting suggestion effect. Since it is lower than the probability, it is difficult to execute the effect that definitively suggests the set value, and it is possible to arouse the player's willingness to play the effect that deterministically suggests the set value. Further, in the case of the set value "4", the setting suggestion effect in the form of the set value "2" or the set value "4" is executed, leaving the possibility of the set value "2" which is relatively advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the hope that the set value is "2", and it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

The setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with loss) shown in FIG. 21 (B) is basically the same as the above-mentioned table without loss, but as a result of performing a lottery such as "do not execute", it is lost. It is a table that can become. That is, when the set value "1" is set, there is a probability of "2/256" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2" is not executed. With a probability of "1/256", it is not possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value is "1", and with a probability of "24/256", with a set value of "1" or a set value of "3". It is not possible to execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests that there is, and there is a probability of "229/256" that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In addition, it does not correspond to the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4". In addition, when the set value "2" is set, there is a probability of "1/256" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2" is not executed. The probability of "24/256" is that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "2" or the setting value is "4" is not executed, and the probability of "231 / 256" is that the setting value is not executed. It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" and the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "3" are applied. There is no. In addition, when the set value "3" is set, there is a probability of "24/256" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3" cannot be executed. There is a probability of "244/256" that it will not be executed. It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2" and the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" are applied. , And the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4". In addition, when the set value "4" is set, there is a probability of "12/256" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4" is not executed. There is a probability of "244/256" that it will not be executed. It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2" and the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" are applied. , And the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3".

The setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with loss) shown in FIG. 21 (C) is basically the same as the above-mentioned table with loss, but the lottery value and the lottery target are different. That is, when the set value "1" is set, there is a probability of "1/4096" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3" is not executed. There is a probability of "4095/4096" that it will not be executed. It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2" and the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" are applied. , And the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4". In addition, when the set value "2" is set, there is a probability of "1/4096" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4" is not executed. There is a probability of "4095/4096" that it will not be executed. It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2" and the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" are applied. , And the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3". In addition, when the set value "3" is set, there is a probability of "1/4096" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3" is not executed. There is a probability of "4095/4096" that it will not be executed. It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2" and the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" are applied. , And the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4". In addition, when the set value "4" is set, there is a probability of "1/4096" that the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4" is not executed. There is a probability of "4095/4096" that it will not be executed. It should be noted that the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2" and the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" are applied. , And the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3". As described above, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with loss) shown in FIG. 21 (C) is compared with the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table (with loss) shown in FIG. 21 (B), for example. It is difficult to win the lottery for the execution of the production, and the number of types of setting suggestion production to win is decreasing. Further, as shown in the place of the setting value "1", even if the setting value is "1", a setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "2", or the setting value "1" Because it does not hit the setting suggestion effect that suggests that it is, it is difficult for the player to obtain useful information. As described above, the reason why there are two types of the table without loss and the table with loss is due to the difficulty of establishing the condition for performing the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect. For example, when a condition that is difficult to satisfy is satisfied, by selecting a table that does not lose, a privilege corresponding to the establishment of the difficult condition is given, and a condition that is easy to satisfy is satisfied. Has built a relationship in which only the benefits corresponding to it can be obtained. The details of the conditions to be established will be described later.

The decorative symbol determination table for setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21 (D) is used when performing the setting suggestion effect by using the loss stop rolls of the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c. This is the table to be referenced. Similar to the tables described in (A) to (C), the vertical axis shows the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the horizontal axis shows the combination of each decorative symbol image to be stopped and the setting suggestion effect. Shows the relationship with. That is, when the set value "1" is set, there is a probability of "1/256" that the decorative symbol combination of "456" suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2" is stopped. And stop the decorative symbol combination of "357" suggesting that it is the set value "1" or the set value "3" with the probability of "1/256", and do not execute it with the probability of "254/256". , And the decorative symbol combination suggesting that the set value is "1" and the decorative symbol combination of "246" suggesting that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4" are not stopped. Further, when the set value "2" is set, there is a probability of "1/256" that the decorative symbol combination of "456" suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2" is stopped. And stop the decorative symbol combination of "246" which suggests that it is the set value "2" or the set value "4" with the probability of "1/256", and do not execute it with the probability of "254/256". , And the decorative symbol combination suggesting that the set value is "1" and the decorative symbol combination of "357" suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3" are not stopped. In addition, when the set value "3" is set, there is a probability of "1/256" that the decorative symbol combination of "357" suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3" is stopped. With a probability of "255/256", it will not be executed, and the decorative symbol combination of "456" suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2" can be stopped, or the setting value "1" can be stopped. The decorative symbol combination suggesting that the value is "2" or the set value "2" or the decorative symbol combination of "246" suggesting that the setting value is "4" is not stopped. Further, when the set value "4" is set, there is a probability of "1/256" that the decorative symbol combination of "246" suggesting that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4" is stopped. With a probability of "255/256", it will not be executed, and the decorative symbol combination of "456" suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2" can be stopped, or the setting value "1" can be stopped. The decorative symbol combination suggesting that the value is "1" or the set value "1" or the decorative symbol combination of "357" suggesting that the setting value is "3" is not stopped. In this way, the decorative symbol determination table for setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21 (D) performs the setting suggestion effect by the combination of the stop rolls of each decorative symbol, so that when each decorative symbol is stopped, the reach is reached. In addition to the original enjoyment such as whether or not it will be, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the combination of decorative symbols that suggests the setting is stopped, and the interest of the game can be improved. The stop result constitutes a stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped.

The setting suggestion effect dialogue notice (effect button notice) determination table shown in FIG. 21 (E) is used when performing the setting suggestion effect using the dialogue content in the "line notice" derived from the above-mentioned "effect button notice". This is the table to be referenced. Similar to the tables described in (A) to (D), the vertical axis shows the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the horizontal axis shows the relationship between the dialogue notice content and the setting suggestion effect. ing. That is, when the set value "1" is set, the probability of "1/256" is to derive the dialogue notice "Anyway stickiness!" That suggests that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2". Then, with a probability of "1/256", a line notice "worth sticking !?" suggesting that the set value is "1" or a set value of "3" is derived, and with a probability of "254/256", It will not be executed, and it will not derive the dialogue notice that suggests that the setting value is "1" or the dialogue warning that suggests that it is the setting value "2" or the setting value "4". .. In addition, when the set value "2" is set, the probability of "1/256" is to derive the dialogue notice "Anyway stickiness!" That suggests that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2". However, with a probability of "1/256", a line notice "OK" that suggests that the set value is "2" or a set value of "4" is derived, and with a probability of "254/256", it is not executed. , And does not derive the dialogue notice that suggests that the setting value is "1" or the dialogue notice that suggests that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "3". .. In addition, when the set value "3" is set, there is a probability of "1/256", and the line notice "worth sticking !?" suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3". Is derived, and with a probability of "255/256", it will not be executed, and it will be suggested that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2". There is no derivation of the line notice that suggests that there is, or the line notice that suggests that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4". In addition, when the set value "4" is set, the probability of "1/256" is to derive the dialogue notice "OK" that suggests that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4". However, with a probability of "255/256", it will not be executed, and the line notice "Anyway sticky!", Which suggests that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2", or the setting value is "1". There is no derivation of the dialogue notice that suggests that the setting value is "1" or the setting value "3" or the dialogue notice that suggests that the setting value is "3". In this way, the setting suggestion effect dialogue notice (effect button notice) determination table shown in FIG. 21 (E) performs the setting suggestion effect based on the dialogue content in the "line notice" derived from the "effect button notice". In addition to the original enjoyment such as whether or not it will develop into reach and whether or not a winning game will be given, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a setting suggestion effect may be performed. When the "notice" is generated, the effect button 14 can be positively operated, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 29, the conditions for performing the execution lottery for the setting suggestion effect during non-variation, the processing performed when the conditions are satisfied, the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect, and the like will be described. conduct.

The flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24 are processes performed in response to the received command or the like after receiving the main command in step S301 of FIG. Further, "when the first start opening winning command is received or when the second starting opening winning command is received" shown in step S303-1-1 constitutes the first condition for performing the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect during non-variation. Then, similarly, step S303-1-2 constitutes the second condition, step S303-1-11 constitutes the third condition, and step S303-1-16 constitutes the fourth condition. Then, step S303-2-1 and step S303-1-22 constitute the fifth condition, and steps S303-2-1 and step S303-1-27 constitute the sixth condition, and step S303-1. −32 constitutes the seventh condition, step S303-1-37 constitutes the eighth condition, steps S303-1-41 and steps S303-1-42 constitute the ninth condition, and step S303. -1-47 constitutes the tenth condition, and steps S303-1-52 constitute the eleventh condition. That is, when these first to eleventh conditions are satisfied, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and if it is successful, the setting suggestion effect is executed. The conditions are not limited to the first to eleventh conditions, and other conditions may be included. For convenience, they are collectively described in the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24. For example, the first condition. It may be a form including only, a form including a first condition and a second condition, a form including all the conditions as shown in the flowchart, and the combination of each condition can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24, the "lottery" is performed, but the setting suggestion effect may be always executed when the condition is satisfied without performing the "lottery".

(Step S303-1-1)
In step S303-1-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is at the time of receiving the first start opening winning command or the second starting opening winning command. That is, in step S301 of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the first start opening winning command or the second starting opening winning command is received as the main command. If any of these commands has been received, the process shifts to step S303-1-2, and if none of these commands has been received, the process shifts to step S303-1-11.

(Step S303-1-2)
In step S303-1-2, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the prize is won in a state where the fourth storage area is stored. Here, in determining whether or not the prize is won in the state where the fourth storage area is stored, the sub RAM 203 is provided with the "corresponding storage area" to the "fourth storage area" as in the main RAM 103, and the "design" is provided. The number of holds of the "variable game" may be managed, or the "hold number command" is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 each time the storage area is updated, and the command is received. You may manage the number of holds by doing so. Then, if the prize is won in the state where the fourth storage area is stored, the process shifts to step S303-1-3, and if the prize is not in the state where the fourth storage area is stored, step S303- The process shifts to 1-7.

(Step S303-1-3)
In step S303-1-3, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-1-4.

(Step S303-1-4)
In step S303-1-4, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-3. For example, if the extracted random number is "0" or "1", it is not applicable to the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1" or the set value is "2", and the extracted random number is "2". For example, it does not correspond to the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "1", and if the extracted random numbers are "3" to "26", it means that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3". Suggested setting It will not hit the suggestion effect, and if it is a random number other than that, it will not be executed. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-5.

(Step S303-1-5)
In step S303-1-5, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-1--4. That is, in the case of the example given in step S303-1--4, it is determined that the winning is not achieved when any random number of "0" to "26" is extracted. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-1-6, and if it does not win, the process shifts to step S303-1-7.

(Step S303-1-6)
In step S303-1-6, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. For example, when the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2" is hit, the setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2" is output. Set to the port. The effect set in the output port is output to each effect device in step S304 of FIG. 16, and the corresponding effect is executed. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, each game state-specific process (1/3 of non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

(Step S303-1-7)
In step S303-1-7, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21C from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-1-8.

(Step S303-1-8)
In step S303-1-8, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-7. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-9.

(Step S303-1-9)
In step S303-1-9, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-1-8. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-1-10, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (1/3 of the non-variable short) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 of FIG. Migrate processing.

(Step S303-1-10)
In step S303-1-10, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, each game state-specific process (1/3 of non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the first condition during the non-variable short is satisfied when the game ball enters the first starting port 21 or when the game ball enters the second starting port 22, and the non-variable short. The second condition is that the number of holds in the "design variation game" (for example, the number of holds corresponding to the first start port 21) is stored up to the "fourth storage area" (so-called hold full tank). The number of hold of the game ball into the first start port 21 or the hold of the "design variation game" (for example, the number of holds corresponding to the second start port 22) in the first start port 21 is the "fourth storage area". It is established by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 22 in the state of being stored up to (so-called hold full tank state). Therefore, in addition to the original enjoyment of inserting a game ball into the starting port and receiving a prize ball or a winning lottery, it is possible to give another enjoyment such that a setting suggestion effect may be executed. It is possible to arouse the motivation to put a game ball into the starting port. Further, for example, rather than the case where one game ball is inserted into the first starting port 21, five game balls are continuously inserted into the first starting port 21 and stored up to the "fourth storage area". It is more difficult to put it in the state of being on hold (so-called hold full tank state). This is because, in the hold full state, if it is judged as "missing" by the "special symbol collision detection process", it is difficult to select the fluctuation pattern with reach, and the normal fluctuation is selected exclusively, so the hold is full. This is because the time is short and the ball must be hit within that short time. Then, when the first condition during non-variation is satisfied, the table shown in FIG. 21 (C) is referred to, and when the second condition during non-variation is satisfied, FIG. 21 (B) shows. I tried to refer to the table shown. As described above, the table shown in FIG. 21 (B) is easier to execute the setting suggestion effect than the table shown in FIG. 21 (C). If the second condition in the non-variable shortness, which is difficult to satisfy, is satisfied, a corresponding privilege can be given. In addition, since only the prize ball is given to the start opening ball in the hold full tank state, the player has a strong impression of waste, but as in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed. By giving sex, such an impression can be alleviated.

The first condition may be appropriately changed depending on the position where each starting port is provided. For example, as in the present embodiment, if the board surface configuration allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 22 only when hitting right, the first condition is that the game ball enters the first starting port 21. Only if. On the other hand, if the board configuration allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 22 only when hitting to the right, the first condition may be only when the game ball enters the second starting port 22 (that is,). , May be a condition for establishment during variation). Further, if the board configuration is such that the game ball can enter the second start port 22 even when hitting left, the game ball enters the first start port 21 and the game ball enters the second start port 22. It may be the case of a ball. Further, since the game ball can enter each start port even during the hit game, it may be a condition during the non-variable short or during the hit game, or any of the conditions during the non-variable short and during the hit game. May be

(Step S303-1-11)
In step S303-1-11, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is at the time of receiving the normal winning opening winning command. That is, in step S301 of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the normal winning opening winning command is received as the main command. Then, when the normal winning opening winning command is received, the process shifts to step S303-1-12, and when the normal winning opening winning command is not received, the process shifts to step S303-1-16.

(Step S303-1-12)
In step S303-1-12, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (C) from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-1-13.

(Step S303-1-13)
In step S303-1-13, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-12. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-14.

(Step S303-1-14)
In step S303-1-14, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-1-13. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-1-15, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (1/3 of non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 of FIG. Migrate processing.

(Step S303-1-15)
In step S303-1-15, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, each game state-specific process (1/3 of non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the third condition during the non-variable shortness is satisfied when the game ball enters the normal winning opening 23. Originally, the entry of the game ball into the normal winning opening 23 was not interesting to the player because only the prize ball was given, but the setting suggestion effect is executed as in the present embodiment. By giving the possibility, it is possible to make the player interested in the entry of the game ball into the normal winning opening 23. In addition, since the game ball can enter the normal winning opening 23 during the changing short or the winning game, the case where the game ball enters the normal winning opening 23 is referred to as the non-changing short, the changing short, and the normal winning opening 23. It may be a condition during a hit game, or may be a condition during a non-variable short, variable short, or a hit game.

(Step S303-1-16)
In step S303-1-16, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the demo command is being received. That is, in step S301 of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the demo command is received as the main command. Then, when the demo command is received, the process shifts to step S303-1-17, and when the demo command is not received, the process shifts to step S303-2-1.

(Step S303-1-17)
In step S303-1-17, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (C) from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-1-18.

(Step S303-1-18)
In step S303-1-18, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-17. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-19.

(Step S303-1-19)
In step S303-1-19, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-1-18. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-1-20, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (1/3 of the non-variable short) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 of FIG. Migrate processing.

(Step S303-1-20)
In step S303-1-20, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, each game state-specific process (1/3 of non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the fourth condition during non-variation is satisfied when the demo command is received and, for example, the demo screen is displayed. Originally, the demo screen was not interesting to the player, but as in the present embodiment, by giving the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is executed, the display of the demo screen is made interesting. Can be done. The fourth condition during non-variation can be easily established by stopping the launch of the game ball and waiting for a predetermined time. Therefore, if it is easy to produce the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is repeatedly executed. As a result, when it is judged that a high setting value cannot be expected, it is avoided to play a game, which may lead to a decrease in operation. Therefore, by referring to the table shown in FIG. 21C, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such an inconvenience by preventing the setting suggestion effect from appearing easily. Since the display of the demo screen can occur even during the variation, the case where the demo screen is displayed may be used as a condition during the non-variation or during the variation, or during the non-variation or during the variation. It may be any of the conditions of.

(Step S303-2-1)
In step S303-2-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 rotations) has elapsed. That is, with reference to the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 described above, it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation number (for example, 100 rotations) has elapsed while the non-variation is in progress. Then, when the predetermined fluctuation number (for example, 100 rotations) has elapsed, the process shifts to step S303-1-22, and when the predetermined fluctuation number (for example, 100 rotations) has not elapsed, step S303-1-32 Move the process to.

(Step S303-1-22)
In step S303-1-22, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the start of fluctuation is N times (for example, 10 times). Here, the specific effect at the start of fluctuation may be, for example, the "mini character notice" shown in FIG. 19 or the "design action notice". That is, assuming that the "mini character notice" is a specific effect, the sub CPU 201 counts the number of occurrences of the "mini character notice" in the sub RAM 203 when the "mini character notice" is executed, and every time a predetermined fluctuation number (for example, 100 rotations) elapses. In addition, it is determined whether or not the "mini character notice" has occurred N times (for example, 10 times). In addition, the count value of the number of occurrences of the "mini character notice" is cleared every 100 rotations or when the game shifts to the winning game. Then, when the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the start of fluctuation is N times (for example, 10 times), the process shifts to step S303-1-23, and the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the start of fluctuation is N times (for example, 10 times). For example, if it is not 10 times), the process proceeds to step S303-1-27.

(Step S303-1-23)
In step S303-1-23, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (B) from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-1-24.

(Step S303-1-24)
In step S303-1-24, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-23. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-25.

(Step S303-1-25)
In step S303-1-25, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-1-24. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-1-26, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (2/3 of the non-variable short) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 of FIG. Migrate processing.

(Step S303-1-26)
In step S303-1-26, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, each game state-specific process (2/3 in non-variable short) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 in FIG.

As described above, the fifth condition during non-variation is satisfied when the number of occurrences of the specific effect at the start of fluctuation within the predetermined fluctuation number is N times. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the extent to which a specific effect has occurred, and it is possible to make each variation and interest in the effect. In addition, when a notice effect is adopted as a specific effect, in addition to the original enjoyment such as whether or not it develops into reach and whether or not a winning game is given, the number of occurrences within a predetermined number of fluctuations is reduced to N times. In that case, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will be performed, so even if it does not develop into reach or loses, disappointment can be suppressed. In addition, the "mini character notice" is replaced with the "notice for exclusive use during change and short" shown in FIG. When it is N times, the condition may be satisfied.

(Step S303-1-27)
In step S303-1-27, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of occurrences of the specific effect when the fluctuation is stopped is N times (for example, 10 times). Here, the specific effect at the time of stopping the fluctuation may be, for example, the "specific sound notice" shown in FIG. 19 or another notice not shown in FIG. That is, assuming that the "specific sound notice" is a specific effect, the sub CPU 201 counts the number of occurrences of the "specific sound notice" in the sub RAM 203 when the "specific sound notice" is executed, and the predetermined fluctuation number (for example, 100 rotations). Every time it elapses, it is determined whether or not the "specific sound notice" has occurred N times (for example, 10 times). The count value of the number of occurrences of the "specific sound notice" is cleared every 100 rotations or when the game shifts to the winning game. Then, when the number of occurrences of the specific effect when the fluctuation is stopped is N times (for example, 10 times), the process shifts to step S303-1-28, and the number of occurrences of the specific effect when the fluctuation is stopped is N times (for example, 10 times). For example, if it is not (10 times), the process for each game state (2/3 during non-variation) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 in FIG.

(Step S303-1-28)
In step S303-1-28, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-1-29.

(Step S303-1-29)
In step S303-1-29, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-28. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-30.

(Step S303-1-30)
In step S303-1-30, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-1-29. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-1-31, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (2/3 during non-variation) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. Migrate processing.

(Step S303-1-31)
In step S303-1-31, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, each game state-specific process (2/3 in non-variable short) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 in FIG.

As described above, the sixth condition during non-variation is satisfied when the number of occurrences of the specific effect when the fluctuation is stopped within the predetermined fluctuation number is N times. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the extent to which a specific effect has occurred, and it is possible to make each variation and interest in the effect. In addition, when a notice effect is adopted as a specific effect, in addition to the original enjoyment such as whether or not it develops into reach and whether or not a winning game is given, the number of occurrences within a predetermined number of fluctuations is reduced to N times. In that case, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will be performed, so even if it does not develop into reach or loses, disappointment can be suppressed. It should be noted that the "specific sound notice" is replaced with the "notice for exclusive use during change / short period" shown in FIG. The condition may be satisfied when is N times.

(Step S303-1-32)
In step S303-1-32, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a hit of 500 rotations. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not 500 rotations have elapsed without being determined as a "hit" in the "special symbol hit determination process" by referring to the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 described above. do. Then, when there is no "hit" over 500 rotations, the process shifts to step S303-1-33, and when it is less than 500 rotations or after 501 rotations, the process shifts to step S303-1-37.

(Step S303-1-33)
In step S303-1-33, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-1-34.

(Step S303-1-34)
In step S303-1-34, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-33. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process shifts to step S303-1-35.

(Step S303-1-35)
In step S303-1-35, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-1-34. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-1-36, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (2/3 of the non-variable short) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 of FIG. Migrate processing.

(Step S303-1-36)
In step S303-1-36, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, each game state-specific process (2/3 in non-variable short) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 in FIG.

As described above, the seventh condition during non-variation is satisfied when 500 rotations elapse without being determined as "hit" by the "special symbol hit determination process" (also referred to as 500 addiction). In this way, when the player is in a state of 500 addiction, the player feels a great loss, but as in the present embodiment, by giving the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is executed with the 500 addiction as an opportunity, The feeling of loss can be alleviated.

(Step S303-1-37)
In step S303-1-37, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a 1000 rotation hit. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not 1000 rotations have elapsed without being determined as a "hit" in the "special symbol hit determination process" by referring to the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 described above. do. Then, when there is no "hit" over 1000 rotations, the process shifts to step S303-1-38, and when it is less than 1000 rotations or after 1001 rotations, the process shifts to step S303-1-41.

(Step S303-1-38)
In step S303-1-38, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-1-39.

(Step S303-1-39)
In step S303-1-39, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-38. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-40.

(Step S303-1-40)
In step S303-1-40, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, each game state-specific process (2/3 in non-variable short) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 in FIG.

As described above, the eighth condition during non-variation is satisfied when 1000 rotations elapse without being determined as "hit" by the "special symbol hit determination process" (also referred to as 1000 addiction). In this way, when the player is addicted to 1000, the sense of loss of the player becomes considerably large, but the sense of loss is alleviated by giving the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is executed as in the present embodiment. be able to. Further, when the state of 1000 addiction is reached, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (A), which is not lost in the setting suggestion effect execution lottery, is referred to, so that the setting suggestion effect is always executed. , It is possible to give useful information to the player. It is preferable that the seventh condition and the eighth condition in the non-variable shortness are adopted in combination. In this case, the setting suggestion effect may be always executed regardless of whether the state is 500 addicted or 1000 addicted. Then, in the state of 500 addiction, a non-deterministic setting suggestion effect is executed (for example, a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting value "1" or a setting value "3" is executed), and in a state of 1000 addiction, it is confirmed. Setting suggestion effect may be executed (for example, a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value "1" may be executed). With this configuration, the player who sees the setting suggestion effect in a state of being addicted to 500 wants to see a more detailed setting suggestion effect and continues the game, so that the operation can be improved.

(Step S303-1-41)
In step S303-1-41, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the effect button notice. That is, as a result of determining the above-mentioned effect symbol variation pattern, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the effect button notice. Then, when the effect button notice is executed, the process shifts to step S303-1-42, and when the effect button notice is not executed, the process shifts to step S303-1-47.

(Step S303-1-42)
In step S303-1-42, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect button 14 has been pressed. That is, in step S302 of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the effect button 14 is pressed depending on whether or not there is an input from the effect button detection SW14a. For example, it is determined whether or not the effect button notice has been executed in the 1 interrupt cycle, and the input status of the effect button detection SW14a is confirmed in the next 10 interrupt cycle and thereafter. Then, when the effect button 14 is pressed, the process shifts to step S303-1-43, and when the effect button 14 is not pressed, each game state-specific process (3/3 in non-variable short) is performed. After finishing, the process shifts to step S304 of FIG. Although it is determined whether or not the effect button 14 is pressed, the process is looped until the effect button 14 is operated, and if the effect button 14 is not operated within the operation valid period, step S303. The process may be transferred to -1-43. That is, there may be a mode in which the dialogue notice appears without operating the effect button 14.

(Step S303-1-43)
In steps S303-1-43, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting suggestion effect dialogue notice (effect button notice) determination table described with reference to FIG. 21 (E) from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect dialogue notice (effect button notice) determination table is read, the process shifts to step S303-1-44.

(Step S303-1-44)
In step S303-1-44, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number, and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect dialogue notice (effect button notice) determination table read in step S303-1-43. conduct. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process shifts to step S303-1-45.

(Step S303-1-45)
In step S303-1-45, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect dialogue notice has been executed as a result of the lottery in step S303-1-44. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-1-46, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (three-thirds of the non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 of FIG. Migrate processing.

(Step S303-1-46)
In step S303-1-46, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect dialogue notice determined by lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect dialogue notice determined by the lottery is set in the output port, each game state-specific process (three-thirds of the non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG. If the setting suggestion effect dialogue notice is set in the output port in the process, the dialogue notice content already determined along with the determination of the effect symbol variation pattern is rewritten. On the other hand, if it is not executed by the execution lottery for the setting suggestion effect dialogue notice, the dialogue notice already determined according to the determination of the effect symbol variation pattern is executed.

As described above, the ninth condition in the non-variable short is satisfied by pressing the effect button 14 when the effect button notice is selected. Here, like the effect button notice, the button operation promotion effect executed before the reach is more difficult to operate than the button operation promotion effect executed after the reach. This is because the former includes a mere lively production, and the latter does not include such a production and is composed only of a production that is directly connected to the hit, so there is a meaning to operate the buttons in the former. Because it is not expensive. Under such a situation, if the effect button 14 is operated in the effect button notice, it is possible to give the meaning of performing the button operation by giving the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is executed. This also leads to solving the above-mentioned problems such as difficulty in operation. Since the effect button notice can occur even during the change / shortening, pressing the effect button 14 when the effect button notice is selected may be a condition during the non-change / change / change. However, the condition may be either non-variable or variable.

(Step S303-1-47)
In step S303-1-47, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of out balls detected has reached a predetermined number by referring to the value of the out port / entry ball counter provided in the sub RAM 203 described above. Here, the predetermined number is managed in units of 1000 shots such as 1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots, and when 1000 shots are reached, it is determined that the predetermined number is 2000 shots. When it arrives, it is similarly determined that the number is a predetermined number. Then, when the number of out spheres detected is a predetermined number, the process shifts to step S303-1-48, and when the number of out spheres detected is not a predetermined number, the process shifts to step S303-1-52.

(Step S303-1-48)
In step S303-1-48, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (B) from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-1-49.

(Step S303-1-49)
In step S303-1-49, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-48. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-50.

(Step S303-1-50)
In step S303-1-50, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-1-49. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-1-51, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (three-thirds of the non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 of FIG. Migrate processing.

(Step S303-1-51)
In step S303-1-51, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, each game state-specific process (three-thirds of the non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the tenth condition during the non-variable short is that the number of balls entered into the out opening 25 is a predetermined number, in which the game balls do not enter any of the winning openings and bring no benefit to the player. When it reaches (for example, 1000 shots), it is established. In this way, when a predetermined number of out balls is generated, the player feels a loss, but as in the present embodiment, the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is executed with the number of out balls as an opportunity is given. By doing so, the feeling of loss can be alleviated. In addition, since the ball entering the out port 25 may occur during the variable short or during the hit game, it may be a condition during the non-variable short or medium and during the variable short and during the hit game, or during the non-variable short or medium and the change. It may be either short or medium or during a winning game. For example, if the game shifts to the hit game when the number of balls entered into the out port 25 reaches 950 during the non-variable short period, the number of balls entered into the out port 25 may be 1000 during the hit game. Assumed, in that case, the condition may be satisfied during the hit game, and if the number of balls entered into the out port 25 does not reach 1000 during the hit game, 1000 shots will be made during the subsequent variation. The condition may be satisfied when the condition is reached.

(Step S303-1-52)
In step S303-1-52, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the determination time has elapsed. Here, the sub CPU 201 can measure the time, for example, when the game ball enters the first starting port 21. Then, when the predetermined time elapses (for example, when 10 minutes elapse), it is determined that the determination time has elapsed. Then, when the determination time has elapsed, the process shifts to step S303-1-53, and when the determination time has not elapsed, each game state-specific process (three-thirds of the non-variable shorts) is completed. The process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

(Step S303-1-53)
In step S303-1-53, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning rate for the first starting port 21 is equal to or less than a predetermined value. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning rate to the first starting port 21 within the determination time is equal to or less than a predetermined value. Then, when the winning rate to the first starting port 21 within the determination time is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the process shifts to step S303-1-54, and the winning rate to the first starting port 21 within the determination time is increased. If it is not less than or equal to the predetermined value, each game state-specific process (three-thirds of the non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

(Step S303-1-54)
In steps S303-1-54, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (B) from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-1-55.

(Step S303-1-55)
In step S303-1-55, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-1-54. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-1-56.

(Step S303-1-56)
In step S303-1-56, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-1-55. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-1-57, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (three-thirds of the non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 of FIG. Migrate processing.

(Step S303-1-57)
In step S303-1-57, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, each game state-specific process (three-thirds of the non-variable shorts) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the eleventh condition during non-variation is that the winning rate to the first starting port 21 within a predetermined time is equal to or less than a predetermined value, that is, the ball does not enter the first starting port 21 very much. In some cases, it holds. In this way, if the player does not enter the first starting port 21 too much, the player feels a loss, but as in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is triggered by the winning rate of the first starting port 21. By giving the possibility that is executed, the feeling of loss can be alleviated. It should be noted that the first starting port 21 may be replaced with the second starting port 22 as a condition during the variation, or the first starting port 21 and the second starting port 22 may be used together to achieve the non-variable medium and the variable. It may be the condition inside. It may also be a condition during the winning game.

25 to 29 are animations showing the relationship between the case where each condition in the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24 is satisfied and the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect is won and the case where the drawing is not won. First, in FIG. 25, (A-1) and (A-2) show non-winning cases, and (B-1) to (B-5) show winning cases. That is, in (A-1) and (B-1) of FIG. 25, the "design variation game" (in FIG. 25, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c are varied for convenience. It indicates that "a setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition has occurred" when (showing only the state of being) is being performed. The term "setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition occurs" as used herein means the first condition to the third condition, the fifth condition to the eighth condition, which are described in the explanation of the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24. The tenth condition and the eleventh condition are satisfied. For example, when a "design variation game" is being played, a game ball enters the first starting port 21, "a setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition is generated", and as a result of drawing, it is not a win. For example, as shown in (A-2), the display content displayed on the image display device 26 does not change in the next variation (next "design variation game"). On the other hand, if it is a win, as shown in (B-2) to (B-5), the display content displayed on the image display device 26 changes in the next variation (next "design variation game"). Occurs. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is not successful, as shown in (B-2). In the next variation (next "design variation game"), the "hawk" image ChaA is displayed on the image display device 26. This "hawk" image ChaA is an image to be displayed only when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is applied. (In fact, it is an effect that definitely suggests the set value "1"). In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "1" or "2", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "2" is not hit. , (B-3), in the next variation (next "design variation game"), the "eagle" image ChaB is displayed on the image display device 26. This "eagle" image ChaB is a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value "1" or the set value "2" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "2". It is an image to be displayed only when it wins. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "1" or "3", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "3" is not hit. , (B-4), in the next variation (next "design variation game"), the "鴎" image ChaC is displayed on the image display device 26. This "seagull" image ChaC is a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value "1" or the set value "3" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3". It is an image to be displayed only when it wins. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "2" or "4", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "2" or the set value "4" is not hit. , (B-5), in the next variation (next "design variation game"), the "crow" image ChaD is displayed on the image display device 26. This "crow" image ChaD is a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value "2" or the set value "4" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4". It is an image to be displayed only when it wins. The character images (ChaA to ChaD) are images that exclusively suggest the set value, and do not suggest the degree of expectation (possibility) for the winning game. Further, although the character images (ChaA to ChaD) have been described with reference to an example of displaying them during the fluctuation of FIG. 25, they can be displayed when the fluctuation of FIG. 26 is stopped or when the fluctuation of FIG. 27 starts, which will be described later. Of course.

In this way, when the "setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition occurs" and the winning is achieved, the character images (ChaA to ChaD) suggesting the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are displayed during the fluctuation. I did. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", ChaA that deterministically suggests the set value is displayed, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2". When it is ~ "4", it is possible to display ChaB ~ ChaD which suggests the set value indefinitely. Therefore, by displaying ChaA, it is possible to improve the motivation to play and give a sense of superiority, and ChaB ~ ChaD. By the display of, it is possible to give the pleasure of guessing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that (A-2), (B-2) to (B-5) in FIG. 25 represent when each decorative symbol image is displayed in a variable manner at "high speed (period)". , "Variable display" constitutes "low speed (period)" when each decorative symbol image starts variable display, then switches to "medium speed (period)", and further, the above-mentioned "high speed (period)". Switch to the variable display at. Then, after that, the image is switched to "medium speed (period)" again, and then to "low speed (period)", and the reach is formed or the reach is not formed according to the fluctuation pattern, and the decoration of the loss. The combination of symbol images may be stopped and displayed. For example, in the example of FIG. 29 described later, (A-1) and (B-1) are "medium speed (period)", and (A-2), (B-2), and (A-3). ) Is "high speed (period)". The timing of switching from "low speed (period)" to "medium speed (period)" constitutes the first timing after starting the variable display of the identification information, and "high speed (period)" to "medium speed". The timing of switching to "fast (period)" constitutes the second timing.

In addition, in FIG. 25, an example of executing the setting suggestion effect during the change of the next variation (next "design variation game") is described, but the timing of executing the setting suggestion effect is the next variation (next "". It is not limited to the fluctuation of the design fluctuation game "). For example, the timing may be shown in FIGS. 26 and 27. In FIG. 26, cases of non-winning in (A-1) to (A-4) are shown, and cases of winning in (B-1) to (B-4) (as an example, set value "1" or set value. "2" is suggested), and up to "the setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition is generated" is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 25. Then, in the case of non-winning, the temporary stop is accompanied by a normal stop sound at the time of temporary stop of each decorative symbol of the fluctuation (see FIG. 20). That is, when the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c are temporarily stopped, a stop sound of "pesh" is output. On the other hand, in the case of winning, when each decorative symbol of the fluctuation is temporarily stopped, it is stopped by the specific stop sound 3 (see FIG. 20). That is, when the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c are temporarily stopped, a stop sound of "dogo" is output. In this way, since the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested by the stop sound at the time of temporary stop of each decorative symbol image of the fluctuation, what kind of stop sound is accompanied when the fluctuation is stopped. You can also pay attention to the crab and concentrate on the game. Note that, in FIG. 26, an example in which a stop sound is output when each decorative symbol image is temporarily stopped has been described. It may be output at the time of display. This stop sound constitutes a stop mode when the variable display of the identification information is stopped.

Further, in FIG. 27, the cases of non-winning are shown in (A-1) to (A-3), and the cases of winning in (B-1) to (B-4) (as an example, the set value "1" or The setting value "3" is suggested), and the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 25 is shown up to "the setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition occurs". Then, in the case of non-winning, each decorative symbol image starts to fluctuate at the same time when the fluctuation of the next fluctuation starts (see FIG. 20). On the other hand, in the case of winning, the fluctuation starts in pattern 7 (see FIG. 20). That is, the right decorative symbol image 26c first starts to fluctuate (B-2), then the left decorative symbol image 26a starts to fluctuate (B-3), and finally the middle decorative symbol image 26b starts to fluctuate. Start (B-4). In this way, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested by the variation start order of each decorative symbol image at the start of the variation of the next variation (next "symbol variation game"). At the start of the fluctuation, it is possible to pay attention to what kind of variation start order of each decorative symbol image is, and it is possible to concentrate on the game. In addition, "at the start of fluctuation" means that a game ball enters one of the start ports while the above demo screen is displayed, and the start of the "design fluctuation game" whose execution has been suspended. It is assumed that the conditions are satisfied, and the start of the pseudo-variation in the above-mentioned "pseudo-continuous notice" is excluded from the "start of fluctuation" in which the setting suggestion effect in the present embodiment can be executed. That is, at the start of the pseudo-variation in the "pseudo-continuous notice", the execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to the "pseudo-ream notice".

Next, in FIG. 28, cases of non-winning are shown by (A-1) to (A-6), and cases of winning are shown by (B-1) to (B-6). In addition, the example of FIG. 28 corresponds to the establishment of the fourth condition described in the explanation of the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24. For example, (A-1) and (B-1) indicate before the fluctuation stop, and (A-2) and (B-2) indicate the fluctuation stop. Then, in (A-2) and (B-2), it is shown that the number of holds of the "design variation game" is "0". Then, as shown in (A-3) and (B-3), it is shown that the demo command is received and the lottery is performed accordingly. In (A-3) and (B-3), the demo screen has started, and the model name image 26o "○○○" is displayed. Then, when a predetermined time elapses from (A-3) and (B-3), as shown in (A-4) and (B-4), the model name image 26o "○○○" is displayed. Instead, a maker name image 26p of "○○ Co., Ltd." is displayed. Further, when a predetermined time elapses from (A-4) and (B-4), a message image 26q prompting an appropriate game is displayed as shown in (A-5) and (B-5). ing. Then, in (A-6) and (B-6), the display modes shown in (A-2) and (B-2) are displayed again, and thereafter, unless a game ball enters any of the starting ports. (A-3) to (A-5) loop. Here, in the non-winning case (A-6), the display mode is exactly the same as in (A-2), but in the winning case (B-6), in addition to the display mode (B-2). Then, the "seagull" image ChaC, which is a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "3", is displayed. When the model name image 26o is displayed, the maker name image 26p is displayed, or the message image 26q prompting an appropriate game is displayed, the setting suggestion effect is executed. It is an impossible period. In this way, since the setting suggestion effect is performed using the demo screen, it is possible to make the display of the demo screen interesting as described above. Further, when the model name image 26o is displayed, the maker name image 26p is displayed, or the message image 26q prompting an appropriate game is displayed, the setting suggestion effect is executed. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing of (B-6) in FIG. 28, which is an impossible period and these displays are completed, the advertising effect by displaying the model name image 26o and the manufacturer name image 26p can be obtained. , It is possible to prevent the effect of improving the soundness of the game by displaying the message image 26q urging the player to perform an appropriate game from being diluted. In addition, on the demo screen, if the execution lottery for the setting suggestion effect is won, the game ball enters one of the starting ports without executing the setting suggestion effect during the demonstration, and "design variation". The setting suggestion effect may be executed at any of the start of the change of the game, the change, and the stop of the change. In this way, it is possible to effectively prevent the cunning act of trying to obtain only useful information without playing a game. In addition, the demo screen (during the demo) that enables the setting suggestion effect to be executed excludes the demo screen (during the demo) that is displayed when the power is turned on. That is, the demo screen (during the demo) displayed when the power is turned on cannot execute the setting suggestion effect. In this way, it is possible to effectively prevent the cunning act of trying to obtain only useful information without playing a game when the game store is opened.

Next, in FIGS. 29, (A-1) to (A-3) show non-winning cases, and (B-1) to (B-5) show winning cases. In addition, the example of FIG. 29 corresponds to the establishment of the ninth condition described in the explanation of the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24. For example, (A-1) and (B-1) indicate that the effect button notice has occurred, and the effect button image imitating the effect button 14 is displayed on the image display device 26. Then, in both (A-1) and (B-1), it is assumed that the effect button 14 is operated by the player. When the effect button 14 is operated by the player, the character image ChaE is displayed and the dialogue image "..." is displayed as shown in (A-2) and (B-2). Then, in the case of non-winning, as shown in (A-3), the character image ChaE is hidden after the elapse of a predetermined time. On the other hand, in the winning case, a new character image ChaF and a dialogue image are displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from (B-2). For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "2", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "2" is not hit. , (B-3), when the character image ChaF emits a dialogue image "Anyway sticky!" And the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3". Then, when the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value "1" or the setting value "3" is not successful, as shown in (B-4), the character image ChaF says "It is worth sticking !?" When a dialogue image is emitted and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "2" or the set value "4" is not applied. In that case, as shown in (B-5), the character image ChaF emits a dialogue image of "OK". Even in the case of winning, if the effect button 14 is not pressed by the player, the player will produce the effect if the setting suggestion effect shown in (B-3) to (B-5) is not executed. It is more effective because the button 14 is actively operated. Of course, in the case of winning, even if the effect button 14 is not pressed by the player, the setting suggestion effect shown in (B-3) to (B-5) may be executed.

In the examples of FIGS. 25 to 27 and 29, when the special symbol variation pattern accompanied by "reach" is determined, the period during which "reach" is executed (FIGS. 25 to 27 and 29). (Not shown in the example) is the period during which the execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted. In other words, when the "reach" is formed, the player's attention will be focused on whether or not the winning game is given. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion effect is executed during the period during which the "reach" is being executed, the player may overlook it. Therefore, by limiting the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the period during which the "reach" is being executed, it is possible to attract the attention of the player and whether or not the game is given.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 34, the conditions for performing the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect during the variation, the processing performed when the conditions are satisfied, the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect, and the like will be described. ..

The flowcharts of FIGS. 30 to 32 are processes performed in response to the received command or the like after receiving the main command in step S301 of FIG. Further, the "no hit per 200 rotations" shown in step S303-2-2 constitutes the first condition for performing the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect during the variation, and similarly, in the same manner, step S303-2-8. Consists of the second condition, step S303-2-13 constitutes the third condition, step S303-2-19 constitutes the fourth condition, and step S303-2-24 constitutes the fifth condition. Step S303-2-30 constitutes the sixth condition, step S303-2-35 constitutes the seventh condition, step S303-2-42 constitutes the eighth condition, and the step S303-2-48 constitutes the ninth condition. That is, when these first to ninth conditions are satisfied, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and if it is successful, the setting suggestion effect is executed. The conditions are not limited to the first to ninth conditions, and other conditions may be incorporated. For convenience, the conditions are collectively described in the flowcharts of FIGS. 30 to 32. For example, the first condition. It may be a form including only, a form including a first condition and a second condition, a form including all the conditions as shown in the flowchart, and the combination of each condition can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the flowcharts of FIGS. 30 to 32, the "lottery" is performed, but the setting suggestion effect may be always executed when the condition is satisfied without performing the "lottery".

(Step S303-2-1)
In step S303-2-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the suggestion effect execution completed flag is ON. Here, the sub RAM 203 is provided with a flag storage area for which the suggestion effect has been executed. During the variation, once the setting suggestion effect is performed, the flag is turned ON, and thereafter, the setting suggestion effect is performed. It is configured not to run. The reason is that during the change-short game state, the probability of hitting is easier to hit than in the normal game state in the probabilistic game state, and the upper limit of 100 rotations is set in the time-saving game state, so the period of stay is set. Is shorter than the normal game state. If you execute the setting suggestion effect many times in this short period, it will be annoying, or the setting suggestion effect that you can not expect a high setting value will occur frequently, and you will quit the game after the end of the variation state and the operation will start. This is because there is a concern that it will decline. Then, when the suggestion effect execution flag is ON, each game state-specific process (1/3 of the variation) is completed, the process is shifted to step S304 of FIG. 16, and the suggestion effect execution flag is ON. If not, the process proceeds to step S303-2-2.

(Step S303-2-2)
In step S303-2-2, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a hit of 200 rotations. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not 200 rotations have elapsed without being determined as a "hit" in the "special symbol hit determination process" by referring to the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 described above. do. Then, if there is no "hit" over 200 rotations, the process shifts to step S303-2-3, and if it is less than 200 rotations, or after 201 rotations, the process shifts to step S303-2-8. In addition, in this embodiment, since the time saving game state is 100 times, the processing corresponds to the case where there is no hit of 200 rotations in the "probability changing game state" during the change.

(Step S303-2-3)
In step S303-2-3, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-2-4.

(Step S303-2-4)
In step S303-2-4, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-2-3. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-2-5.

(Step S303-2-5)
In step S303-2-5, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-2-4. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-2-6, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (1/3 during variation) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-2-6)
In step S303-2-6, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-2-7.

(Step S303-2-7)
In step S303-2-7, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (1/3 of the variation) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

In this way, the first condition during the change is that when 200 rotations have passed without being judged as a "hit" by the "special symbol hit detection process" in the "probability change game state" during the change (200 addictions). Say), it holds. As described above, the "probability variation game state" is easily determined to be "hit" in the hit determination of the normal symbol, and the opening / closing mode of the second starting port 22 when it is determined to be a hit is also an advantageous opening / closing mode. Therefore, basically, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held, but as the number of fluctuations increases, it becomes more difficult to maintain the balls held. Therefore, in the situation of 200 addiction, the number of balls held is often less than that in the stage of 0 rotation, which is not a good situation for the player. From such a situation, the player's sense of loss also increases, but as in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed when there is no hit of 200 rotations in the "probability change game state" during the change. By giving the possibility of being lost, the feeling of loss can be alleviated.

(Step S303-2-8)
In step S303-2-8, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a hit of 400 rotations. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not 400 rotations have elapsed without being determined as a "hit" in the "special symbol hit determination process" by referring to the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 described above. do. Then, when there is no "hit" over 400 rotations, the process shifts to step S303-2-9, and when it is less than 400 rotations or after 401 rotations, the process shifts to step S303-2-13. In addition, in this embodiment, since the time saving game state is 100 times, the processing corresponds to the case where there is no hit of 400 rotations in the "probability changing game state" during the change.

(Step S303-2-9)
In step S303-2-9, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-2-10.

(Step S303-2-10)
In step S303-2-10, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-2-9. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-2-11.

(Step S303-2-11)
In step S303-2-11, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-2-12.

(Step S303-2-12)
In step S303-2-12, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (1/3 of the variation) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

In this way, the second condition during the change is that in the "probability change game state" during the change, when 400 rotations elapse without being judged as "hit" by the "special symbol hit detection process" (400 addiction). Say), it holds. In this way, when the player is addicted to 400, the feeling of loss of the player becomes considerably large, but the feeling of loss is alleviated by giving the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is executed as in the present embodiment. be able to. Further, when the state of 400 addiction is reached, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (A), which is not lost in the setting suggestion effect execution lottery, is referred to, so that the setting suggestion effect is always executed. , It is possible to give useful information to the player. It is preferable that the first condition and the second condition during the variation are adopted in combination. In this case, the setting suggestion effect may be always executed in either the 200-addicted state or the 400-addicted state. Then, in the state of 200 addiction, a non-deterministic setting suggestion effect is executed (for example, a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting value "1" or a setting value "3" is executed), and in a state of 400 addiction, it is confirmed. Setting suggestion effect may be executed (for example, a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value "1" may be executed). With this configuration, even if you are addicted to 400, you can alleviate the feeling of loss.

(Step S303-2-13)
In step S303-2-13, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of consecutive hits is "5" by referring to the value of the continuous hit count counter provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, if the number of consecutive hits is "5", the process shifts to step S303-2-14, and if the number of consecutive hits is not "5", the process shifts to step S303-2-19. ..

(Step S303-2-14)
In step S303-2-14, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (B) from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-2-15.

(Step S303-2-15)
In step S303-2-15, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-2-14. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-2-16.

(Step S303-2-16)
In step S303-2-16, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-2-15. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-2-17, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (1/3 during variation) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-2-17)
In step S303-2-17, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-2-18.

(Step S303-2-18)
In step S303-2-18, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (1/3 of the variation) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the third condition during the variation is satisfied when the number of consecutive hits reaches "5" times. As a result, in addition to the sense of accomplishment caused by the continuous hitting games, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Step S303-2-19)
In step S303-2-19, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of consecutive hits is "10" by referring to the value of the continuous hit count counter provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, if the number of continuous hits is "10", the process shifts to step S303-2-20, and if the number of continuous hits is not "10", the process shifts to step S303-2-24. ..

(Step S303-2-20)
In step S303-2-20, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-2-21.

(Step S303-2-21)
In step S303-2-21, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S303-2-20. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-2-22.

(Step S303-2-22)
In step S303-2-22, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-2-23.

(Step S303-2-23)
In step S303-2-23, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (2/3 during variation) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the fourth condition during the variation is satisfied when the number of consecutive hits reaches "10" times. As a result, in addition to the sense of accomplishment caused by the continuous hitting games, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when the number of consecutive hits reaches "10" times, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (A) without loss in the setting suggestion effect execution lottery is referred to, so that the setting suggestion is always made. By executing the effect, useful information can be given to the player. It is preferable that the third condition and the fourth condition during the variation are adopted in combination. In this case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed regardless of whether the number of continuous hits reaches "5" times or the number of consecutive hits reaches "10" times. Then, when the number of consecutive hits reaches "5", an indeterminate setting suggestion effect is executed (for example, a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting value "1" or a setting value "3" is executed). When the number of consecutive hits reaches "10" times, a definite setting suggestion effect may be executed (for example, a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting value "1" may be executed). With this configuration, it is possible to add sufficient value to the fact that the winning game is continued "10" times, which is more difficult than "5" times in a row.

(Step S303-2-24)
In step S303-2-24, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is "3" by referring to the value of the number of times counter per 10 consecutive rounds provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, if the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is "3", the process shifts to step S303-2-25, and if the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is not "3", the process proceeds to step S303-2-30. Migrate processing.

(Step S303-2-25)
In step S303-2-25, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-2-26.

(Step S303-2-26)
In step S303-2-26, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-2-25. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-2-27.

(Step S303-2-27)
In step S303-2-27, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-2-27. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-2-28, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (2/3 during variation) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-2-28)
In step S303-2-28, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-2-29.

(Step S303-2-29)
In step S303-2-29, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (2/3 during variation) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the fifth condition during the variation is satisfied when the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "3" times. As a result, in addition to the sense of accomplishment obtained by continuing the game per 10 rounds, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Step S303-2-30)
In step S303-2-30, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is "6" by referring to the value of the number of times counter per 10 consecutive rounds provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, if the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is "6", the process shifts to step S303-2-31, and if the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is not "6", the process proceeds to step S303-2-35. Migrate processing.

(Step S303-2-31)
In step S303-2-31, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-2-32.

(Step S303-2-32)
In step S303-2-32, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-2-31. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-2-33.

(Step S303-2-33)
In step S303-2-33, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-2-34.

(Step S303-2-34)
In step S303-2-34, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (2/3 during variation) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the sixth condition during the variation is satisfied when the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "6" times. As a result, in addition to the sense of accomplishment obtained by continuing the game per 10 rounds, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the number of times per 10 rounds reaches "6" times, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. By executing the setting suggestion effect, useful information can be given to the player. It is preferable that the fifth condition and the sixth condition during the variation are adopted in combination. In this case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed regardless of whether the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "3" times or the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "6" times. Then, when the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "3", an indeterminate setting suggestion effect is executed (for example, a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting value "1" or a setting value "3" is executed). Then, when the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds reaches "6" times, a definite setting suggestion effect may be executed (for example, a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting value "1" may be executed). .. With this configuration, it is possible to add sufficient value to the fact that the game is played "6" times in a row, which is more difficult than playing the game "3" times in a row per 10 rounds.

(Step S303-2-35)
In step S303-2-35, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the symbol designation command is being received. That is, in step S301 of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command is received as the main command. Then, when the symbol designation command is received, the process shifts to step S303-2-36, and when the symbol designation command is not received, the process shifts to step S303-2-42.

(Step S303-2-36)
In step S303-2-36, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the symbol indicated by the symbol designation command is a special symbol D or a special symbol G (essentially, it is a loss). Then, when the symbol indicated by the symbol designation command is either the special symbol D or the special symbol G, the process shifts to step S303-2-37, and the symbol indicated by the symbol designation command is the special symbol D or the special symbol G. If it is neither of the special symbols G, the processing for each game state (3/3 during variation) is completed, and the processing is shifted to step S304 of FIG.

(Step S303-2-37)
In step S303-2-37, the sub CPU 201 reads out the decorative symbol determination table for setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 21 (D) from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the decorative symbol determination table for setting suggestion effect is read, the process shifts to step S303-2-38.

(Step S303-2-38)
In step S303-2-38, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the decorative symbol determination table for setting suggestion effect read in step S303-2-37. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-2-39.

(Step S303-2-39)
In step S303-2-39, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-2-38. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-2-40, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (3/3 during variation) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-2-40)
In step S303-2-40, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect (decorative symbol) determined by lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect (decorative symbol) determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-2-41.

(Step S303-2-41)
In step S303-2-41, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (3/3 during variation) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the seventh condition during the variation is satisfied when the special symbol D or the special symbol G (both are lost) is received as the symbol designation command. Then, the setting suggestion effect is performed by using the combination of the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c. Originally, the combination of the lost symbols during the variation was not interesting for the player, but by giving the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is executed as in the present embodiment, what kind of You can be interested in whether the combination of lost symbols is displayed. It should be noted that even during non-variable short and short, the condition may be satisfied when special symbol D or special symbol G (both are lost) is received as the symbol designation command, or as a special symbol designation command only during non-variable short and short. The condition may be satisfied when the symbol D or the special symbol G (both are lost) is received.

(Step S303-2-42)
In step S303-2-42, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gate passage command is received. That is, in step S301 of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the gate passage command is received as the main command. Then, when the gate passing command is received, the process shifts to step S303-2-43, and when the gate passing command is not received, the process shifts to step S303-2-48.

(Step S303-2-43)
In step S303-2-43, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (C) from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-2-44.

(Step S303-2-44)
In step S303-2-44, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-2-43. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-2-45.

(Step S303-2-45)
In step S303-2-45, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-2-44. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-2-46, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (3/3 during variation) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-2-46)
In step S303-2-46, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-2-47.

(Step S303-2-47)
In step S303-2-47, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (3/3 during variation) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the eighth condition during the variation is satisfied when the gate passage command is received (that is, when the game ball passes through the gate member 20). As a result, in addition to the original enjoyment of whether or not it is judged as a hit in the normal symbol hit detection process, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a setting suggestion effect may be performed, and the game entertainment is improved. Can be planned. In addition, as long as the board surface configuration allows the game ball to pass through the gate member 20 even when hitting to the left, the conditions may be during non-variable short and short, and either non-variable or variable or short. May be.

(Step S303-2-48)
In step S303-2-48, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the specific advance notice effect. That is, as a result of determining the above-mentioned effect symbol variation pattern, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the special notice during the change. Then, when executing the special notice during the change, the process shifts to step S303-2-49, and when the special notice during the change is not executed, each game state-specific process (3/3 during the change) is performed. After finishing, the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

(Step S303-2-49)
In step S303-2-49, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-2-50.

(Step S303-2-50)
In step S303-2-50, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-2-49. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-2-51.

(Step S303-2-51)
In step S303-2-51, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-2-50. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-2-52, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (3/3 during variation) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-2-52)
In step S303-2-52, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-2-53.

(Step S303-2-53)
In step S303-2-53, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (3/3 during variation) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the ninth condition during the variation is satisfied when the specific advance notice effect during the variation is executed. As a result, in addition to the original enjoyment of developing a reach and the possibility of being given a winning game, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that a setting suggestion effect may be performed, which is a hobby of the game. It can be improved.

33 and 34 are animations showing the relationship between the case where each condition in the flowcharts of FIGS. 30 to 32 is satisfied and the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect is won and the case where the setting suggestion effect is not won. First, in FIG. 33, cases of non-winning are shown by (A-1) and (A-2), and cases of winning are shown by (B-1) to (B-5). The background image 26R (night background image) is displayed. That is, in (A-1) and (B-1) of FIG. 33, the "design variation game" (in FIG. 33, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c are varied for convenience. It indicates that "a setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition has occurred" when (showing only the state of being) is being performed. Here, "the setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition occurs" corresponds to the establishment of the first condition, the second condition, and the seventh condition to the ninth condition. For example, if the "design variation game" shown in (A-1) and (B-1) is the variation of the "200th" rotation, "a setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition occurs", and as a result of drawing, no winning is won. If this is the case, as shown in (A-2), the display content (background image) displayed on the image display device 26 does not change in the next variation (next "design variation game"). On the other hand, if it is a win, as shown in (B-2) to (B-5), the display content displayed on the image display device 26 changes in the next variation (next "design variation game"). Occurs. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is not successful, as shown in (B-2). In the next variation (next "design variation game"), the "golden full moon" image 26S is displayed on the image display device 26. This "golden full moon" image 26S is an image displayed only when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is applied. There is (in fact, it is an effect that definitely suggests the set value "1"). In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "1" or "2", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "2" is not hit. , (B-3), in the next variation (next "design variation game"), the "half moon" image 26T is displayed on the image display device 26. This "half moon" image 26T is a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value "1" or the set value "2" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "2". It is an image to be displayed only when it wins. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "1" or "3", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "3" is not hit. , (B-4), in the next variation (next "design variation game"), the "crescent moon" image 26U is displayed on the image display device 26. This "crescent moon" image 26U is a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value "1" or the set value "3" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3". It is an image to be displayed only when it wins. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "2" or "4", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "2" or the set value "4" is not hit. , (B-5), in the next variation (next "design variation game"), the "full moon" image 26V is displayed on the image display device 26. This "full moon" image 26V is a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value "2" or the setting value "4" when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4". It is an image to be displayed only when it wins. The images (26S to 26V) suggesting the set value are images that exclusively suggest the set value, and do not suggest the degree of expectation (possibility) for the winning game.

In this way, when "a setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition occurs" and a win is obtained, an image (26S to 26V) suggesting a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed during fluctuation. I made it. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", 26S that deterministically suggests the set value is displayed, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2". In the case of ~ "4", 26T, 26U, and 26V, which suggest the set value indefinitely, can be displayed. Therefore, the display of 26S can improve the motivation for playing and give a sense of superiority, and 26T. , 26U, 26V can give the pleasure of guessing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in FIG. 33, an example of executing the setting suggestion effect during the change of the next change (next "symbol change game") is described, but the timing of executing the setting suggestion effect is the next change (next "". It is not limited to the fluctuation of the design fluctuation game "). For example, as mentioned in the above-mentioned non-variable short-term example, it may be at the time when the fluctuation of the fluctuation is stopped, or at the time when the fluctuation of the next fluctuation (next "design fluctuation game") starts. , The next fluctuation (next "design fluctuation game") may be stopped. In particular, when the fluctuation is stopped, the combination of the lost decorative symbols may be stopped based on the table shown in FIG. 21 (D) when the seventh condition is satisfied.

Next, in FIG. 34, (A-1) and (A-2) show non-winning cases, (B-1) and (B-2) show winning cases, and (A-3), (A-4) indicates a non-winning case, and (B-3) and (B-4) indicate a winning case. In addition, FIG. 34 corresponds to the establishment of the third condition to the sixth condition. That is, in (A-1) and (B-1), the ending screen of the winning game is displayed. In both (A-1) and (B-1), it is shown that "per 10 rounds" was obtained twice and "per 5 rounds" was obtained three times, and the number of consecutive hits was obtained. Shows that it became 5 times. Then, in the non-winning case (A-2), only the character image ChaF is displayed in the first rotation after the winning game is completed, whereas in the winning case (B-2). Is the case where the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "1" or "3" together with the character image ChaF in the first rotation after the end of the winning game, and the set value "1" or the set value " The "crescent moon" image 26U that is displayed when the setting suggestion effect suggesting "3" is not won is displayed. Similarly, in (A-3) and (B-3), it is shown that the number of times per 10 consecutive rounds is 3 times, and in the case of non-winning (A-4), the winning game In the first rotation after the end, only the character image ChaF is displayed, whereas in the winning case (B-4), in the first rotation after the end of the winning game, together with the character image ChaF, " The crescent moon image 26U is displayed. In this way, when the number of consecutive hits is 5 or when the number of consecutive 10 rounds is 3 times, the setting suggestion effect can be executed. In addition to the sense of accomplishment, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a setting suggestion effect may be performed. Although the description is omitted in FIG. 34, the description is omitted between (A-1) and (B-1) and between (A-2) and (B-2), and (A-3) and (B). The model name image 26o and the manufacturer name image 26p described above may be displayed between (-3) and (A-4) and (B-4), and these images are displayed. During the period, the setting suggestion effect may be set as the non-executable period. As a result, similar to the above-mentioned effect, the effect that the advertising effect is not diluted can be expected. In addition, a message image 26q prompting an appropriate game may be displayed, and while the image is displayed, the setting suggestion effect may be an unexecutable period, so that the valuable medium is forgotten to be taken. A message image for prevention may be displayed, and while the image is displayed, the setting suggestion effect may be an unexecutable period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 43, the conditions for performing the execution lottery for the setting suggestion effect during the winning game, the processing performed when the conditions are satisfied, the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect, and the like will be described. ..

The flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 37 are processes performed in response to the received command or the like after receiving the main command in step S301 of FIG. Further, "whether the hit is within a predetermined period" shown in step S303-3-2 constitutes the first condition for performing the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect during the hit game, and similarly, in the same manner as in step S303-3-. 7 and step S303-3-8 constitute the second condition, steps S303-3-14 and step S303-3-15 constitute the third condition, and step S303-3-21 constitutes the fourth condition. Step S303-3-27 and step S303-3-28 constitute the fifth condition, step S303-3-33 constitutes the sixth condition, and step S303-3-39 constitutes the seventh condition. Step S303-3-45 constitutes the eighth condition, and step S303-3-51 constitutes the ninth condition. That is, when these first to ninth conditions are satisfied, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and if it is successful, the setting suggestion effect is executed. The conditions are not limited to the first to ninth conditions, and other conditions may be included. For convenience, they are collectively described in the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 37. For example, the first condition. It may be a form including only, a form including a first condition and a second condition, a form including all the conditions as shown in the flowchart, and the combination of each condition can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 37, the "lottery" is performed, but the setting suggestion effect may be always executed when the condition is satisfied without performing the "lottery".

(Step S303-3-1)
In step S303-3-1, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the suggestion effect execution completed flag is ON. Even during the hit game, once the setting suggestion effect is performed, the flag is turned ON and the setting suggestion effect is not executed thereafter (of the hit game). Because the length of stay is short). Then, when the suggestion effect execution flag is ON, each game state-specific process (1/3 during the winning game) is completed, the process is shifted to step S304 of FIG. 16, and the suggestion effect execution flag is ON. If not, the process proceeds to step S303-3-2.

(Step S303-3-2)
In step S303-3-2, the sub CPU 201 refers to the value of the fluctuation number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 and hits within a predetermined period (the determination result of the "special symbol hit determination process" is "hit"). Determine if it exists. In addition, in determining whether or not it is a hit within a predetermined period, another method may be used. For example, time may be used. Further, the starting point of the measurement may be when the power is turned on or when the winning game ends. For example, if it is a hit within 30 minutes from the time when the power is turned on, it may be determined that the hit is within a predetermined period, and if it is a hit within 100 rotations from the time when the power is turned on, it is determined that the hit is within a predetermined period. May be good. Similarly, if it is a hit within 30 minutes from the end of the winning game, it may be determined that the hit is within a predetermined period, and if it is a hit within 100 rotations from the end of the winning game, it is within the predetermined period. It may be determined as a hit. Further, both when the power is turned on and when the winning game ends may be used as the starting point. Then, if the hit is within the predetermined period, the process is shifted to step S303-3-3, and if the hit is not within the predetermined period, the process is shifted to step S303-3-7.

(Step S303-3-3)
In step S303-3-3, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-3-4.

(Step S303-3-4)
In step S303-3-4, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-3. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-3-5.

(Step S303-3-5)
In step S303-3-5, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-3-6.

(Step S303-3-6)
In step S303-3-6, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (1/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

In this way, the first condition during the hit game is satisfied if the hit is within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on or the end of the hit game (the judgment result of the "special symbol hit judgment process" is "hit"). do. As a result, for example, if the starting point is when the power is turned on, the motivation for the game can be increased from the time when the power is turned on until the predetermined period elapses, and if the starting point is the end of the winning game, the predetermined starting point is from the end of the winning game. It is possible to increase the motivation to play until the period elapses. Further, if the hit is within a predetermined period, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (A), which is not lost in the setting suggestion effect execution lottery, is referred to, so that the setting suggestion effect is always executed. As a result, the above-mentioned motivation for playing can be further enhanced.

(Step S303-3-7)
In step S303-3-7, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is at the time of receiving the round command. That is, in step S301 of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not a round command is received as the main command. Then, when the round command is received, the process shifts to step S303-3-8, and when the round command is not received, the process shifts to step S303-3-14.

(Step S303-3-8)
In step S303-3-8, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a specific round (for example, "4" round). Here, in determining whether or not the round is a specific round, the sub RAM 203 is provided with a counter similar to the round number counter provided in the main RAM 103 so that the sub CPU 201 can count the number of rounds. Alternatively, the round command itself may indicate the number of rounds (for example, a round command indicating "4" rounds). Further, a plurality of specific rounds may be provided in one winning game. For example, if it is a winning game in which "5" rounds are given, one specific round may be provided, and in the case of a winning game in which "10" rounds are given, two specific rounds may be provided. It may be provided. Further, if it is a winning game in which a "5" round is given, a specific round may be provided only in the case of a winning game in which a "10" round is given, without providing a specific round. The reverse may be true. Then, when it is determined that it is a specific round, the process shifts to step S303-3-9, and when it is determined that it is not a specific round, each game state-specific process (1/3 during the winning game) is completed. Then, the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

(Step S303-3-9)
In step S303-3-9, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-3-10.

(Step S303-3-10)
In step S303-3-10, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-9. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-3-11.

(Step S303-3-11)
In step S303-3-11, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-3-10. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-3-12, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (1/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-3-12)
In step S303-3-12, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-3-13.

(Step S303-3-13)
In step S303-3-13, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (1/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the second condition during the winning game is satisfied when the result of receiving the round command is a specific round (for example, "4" round). As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the round during the hit game in which the effect is simply developed, and the game interest can be improved.

(Step S303-3-14)
In step S303-3-14, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the interval command between rounds is received. That is, in step S301 of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval command is received as the main command. Then, when the inter-round interval command is received, the process shifts to step S303-3-15, and when the inter-round interval command is not received, the process shifts to step S303-3-21.

(Step S303-3-15)
In step S303-3-15, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a specific inter-round interval (for example, an interval between "4" rounds and "5 rounds"). Here, in determining whether or not the interval is a specific inter-round interval, the sub-RAM 203 described above is provided with a counter similar to the number of round counters to grasp the rounds, and then whether or not the interval is a specific inter-round interval. It may be possible to grasp whether or not it is, or it may be possible to grasp the round by the round command itself and then grasp whether or not it is a specific interval between rounds. Further, as in the specific rounds described above, a plurality of specific round-to-round intervals may be provided in one winning game, or may be different depending on the type of winning game. Then, when it is determined that it is a specific inter-round interval, the process shifts to step S303-3-16, and when it is determined that it is not a specific inter-round interval, each game state-specific process (1 / during a winning game). After finishing 3), the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

(Step S303-3-16)
In step S303-3-16, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-3-17.

(Step S303-3-17)
In step S303-3-17, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-16. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-3-18.

(Step S303-3-18)
In step S303-3-18, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-3-17. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-3-19, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (1/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-3-19)
In step S303-3-19, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-3-20.

(Step S303-3-20)
In step S303-3-20, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (1/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the third condition during the winning game is when the result of receiving the inter-round interval command is a specific inter-round interval (for example, an interval between "4" rounds and "5 rounds"). To establish. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the interval between rounds during the hit game, in which the effect is simply developed, and the game interest can be improved.

(Step S303-3-21)
In step S303-3-21, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. That is, in step S301 of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the ending command is received as the main command. Then, when the ending command is received, the process shifts to step S303-3-22, and when the ending command is not received, the process shifts to step S303-3-27.

(Step S303-3-22)
In step S303-3-22, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-3-23.

(Step S303-3-23)
In step S303-3-23, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-22. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-3-24.

(Step S303-3-24)
In step S303-3-24, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-3-23. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-3-25, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (2/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-3-25)
In step S303-3-25, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-3-26.

(Step S303-3-26)
In step S303-3-26, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (2/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the fourth condition during the winning game is satisfied when the ending command is received. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a setting suggestion effect may be performed in the notification of information related to the winning game and the ending of the winning game in which the effect is simply developed. Can be improved.

(Step S303-3-27)
In step S303-3-27, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a mini-game result notification round (for example, "9" round) based on the reception of the round command. Here, the "mini game" is an effect performed during a hit game, in which "○ × quiz" is displayed on the image display device 26 and an answer is given using the cross key button 16. be. As an example of control, if you press the left button, "○" is selected, if you press the right button, "×" is selected, and if neither is pressed, "○" is automatically selected. One question, one question in the "6" round, one question in the "7" round, and the result will be notified in the "9" round. In addition, the above three questions are managed as one set, and for each scenario, for example, in the case of "scenario 1", the first question is "left" on the cross key button 16 and the second question is the cross key. The correct answer information is stored, such as "left" on the button 16 and "right" on the cross key button 16. Then, the correctness is determined by comparing with the operation input of the cross key button 16 actually operated by the player. Then, if all the questions are correct, the setting suggestion effect is executed. If it is a result notification round in such a mini game, the process shifts to step S303-3-28, and if it is not a result notification round in the mini game, the process shifts to step S303-3-33.

(Step S303-3-28)
In step S303-3-28, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the mini game is successful. That is, as a result of determining the above-mentioned correctness, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not all the questions are correct answers that satisfy all the correct answer information corresponding to the executed scenario. Then, if the result of the mini-game is successful, the process shifts to step S303-3-29, and if the result of the mini-game is not successful, each game state-specific process (2/3 during the winning game) is completed. Then, the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

(Step S303-3-29)
In step S303-3-29, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-3-30.

(Step S303-3-30)
In step S303-3-30, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-29. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-3-31.

(Step S303-3-31)
In step S303-3-31, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-3-32.

(Step S303-3-32)
In step S303-3-32, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (2/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the fifth condition during the winning game is satisfied when it is notified that all the questions are correct in the result notification round of the mini game performed in the winning game. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that a setting suggestion effect may be performed depending on the result of the mini-game during the hit game in which the effect is simply developed, so that the mini-game can be positively performed. It can make you want to play a game. In addition, if all the questions in the mini-game are answered correctly, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table explained with reference to FIG. 21 (A), which is not lost in the setting suggestion effect execution lottery, is referred to, so that the setting suggestion effect is always executed. So, you can make me want to play more mini games.

(Step S303-3-33)
In step S303-3-33, the sub CPU 201 uses the above-mentioned number of winning prize balls (here, total winning output) from the value of the large winning opening winning number counter provided in the sub RAM 203 and the number of prize balls "10". It is determined whether or not the number of shots (called a ball) exceeds 5,000. For example, since the winning game in the present embodiment is a "10" count per round and a "10" prize ball per "1" count, a "100" prize ball can be obtained per round, and "10" is obtained. If it is a "round", a prize ball of "1000" balls can be obtained. Therefore, if the hit to which the "10" round is given is continued "5" times, the affirmative judgment will be made in the process. If over-winning is generated, the number of shots may exceed 5,000, which is less than "5" times. Then, if the total number of balls obtained exceeds 5,000, the process shifts to step S303-3-34, and if the total number of balls obtained does not exceed 5,000, the process proceeds to step S303-3-39. Transition.

(Step S303-3-34)
In step S303-3-34, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-3-35.

(Step S303-3-35)
In step S303-3-35, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-34. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-3-36.

(Step S303-3-36)
In step S303-3-36, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-3-35. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-3-37, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (2/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-3-37)
In step S303-3-37, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-3-38.

(Step S303-3-38)
In step S303-3-38, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (2/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the sixth condition during the winning game is satisfied when the number of winning prize balls in the continuous winning game exceeds 5,000. As a result, in addition to the satisfaction of being able to win many prize balls in a row, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that a setting suggestion effect may be performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .. In addition, in order to reach 5000 shots as soon as possible, during the winning game, the game can be played while wishing for the occurrence of over-winning, etc., and the winning game can be concentrated. If the number of shots reaches 5,000 but the setting suggestion effect is not executed, it may be determined that the number of shots exceeds 5,000 in the next hit game as long as it is a continuous hit.

(Step S303-3-39)
In step S303-3-39, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the time when the large winning opening winning command is received. That is, in step S301 of FIG. 16, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening winning command is received as the main command. Then, when the large winning opening winning command is received, the process shifts to step S303-3-40, and when the large winning opening winning command is not received, the process shifts to step S303-3-45. do.

(Step S303-3-40)
In steps S303-3-40, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21 (C) from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-3-41.

(Step S303-3-41)
In step S303-3-41, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-40. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-3-42.

(Step S303-3-42)
In step S303-3-42, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-3-41. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-3-43, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (3/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-3-43)
In step S303-3-43, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-3-44.

(Step S303-3-44)
In step S303-3-44, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (3/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the seventh condition during the winning game is satisfied when the game ball enters the large winning opening 24. Originally, the entry of the game ball into the large prize opening 24 was not interesting to the player because only the prize ball was given, but the setting suggestion effect is executed as in the present embodiment. By giving the possibility, it is possible to make the player interested in the entry of the game ball into the grand prize opening 24.

(Step S303-3-45)
In step S303-3-45, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the number of times of receiving the large winning opening winning command per round, which is counted by the sub CPU 201, exceeds "10", that is, whether or not an over winning has occurred. do. Then, when an over-winning occurs, the process shifts to step S303-3-46, and when no over-winning occurs, the process shifts to step S303-3-51.

(Step S303-3-46)
In step S303-3-46, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-3-47.

(Step S303-3-47)
In step S303-3-47, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-46. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-3-48.

(Step S303-3-48)
In step S303-3-48, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-3-47. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-3-49, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (3/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-3-49)
In step S303-3-49, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-3-50.

(Step S303-3-50)
In step S303-3-50, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (3/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the eighth condition during the winning game is satisfied when a game ball (more than 10 game balls) enters the large winning opening 24 per round. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be executed by generating the over prize, and it is possible to concentrate on the winning game.

(Step S303-3-51)
In step S303-3-51, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the above-mentioned attacker full open (here, referred to as a large winning opening full open) has occurred. Then, when the attacker full open occurs, the process shifts to step S303-3-52, and when the attacker full open does not occur, each game state-specific process (3/3 during the winning game) is completed. , The process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

(Step S303-3-52)
In step S303-3-52, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the sub ROM 202 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S303-3-53.

(Step S303-3-53)
In step S303-3-53, the sub CPU 201 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read in step S303-3-52. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S303-3-54.

(Step S303-3-54)
In step S303-3-54, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S303-3-53. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S303-3-55, and if it does not win, each game state-specific process (3/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process proceeds to step S304 in FIG. To migrate.

(Step S303-3-55)
In step S303-3-55, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S303-3-56.

(Step S303-3-56)
In step S303-3-56, the sub CPU 201 turns on the suggestion effect execution completed flag in the suggestion effect execution completed flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 203. Then, when the suggestion effect execution completed flag is turned ON, each game state-specific process (3/3 during the winning game) is completed, and the process shifts to step S304 of FIG.

As described above, the ninth condition during the winning game is satisfied when the large winning opening is fully opened. As a result, when 10 game balls cannot be entered in one round due to external factors, the prize balls for the amount not entered cannot be obtained, but the setting is suggested instead. By giving the possibility that the production will be executed, it is possible to alleviate the feeling of loss due to not being able to obtain the prize balls for the amount that could not be entered.

38 to 43 are animations showing the relationship between the case where each condition in the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 to 37 is satisfied and the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect is won and the case where the setting suggestion effect is not won. First, FIG. 38 corresponds to the establishment of the first condition described in the description of the flowchart of FIGS. 35 to 37. That is, in FIG. 38, (A) represents the first appearance "123" in the morning when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and shows the display mode when the gaming store is opened. Then, from the opening of the store in the morning, as shown in (B), a game ball is inserted into the first starting port 21 within 100 rotations (or within 30 minutes), and in the "special symbol collision detection process". When it is determined to be a hit, the setting suggestion effect shown in (C-1) to (C-4) is executed during the hit game in which the large winning opening 24 is opened. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is not successful, as shown in (C-1). In the first round of the winning game, the character image 26w is displayed on the image display device 26 together with the round display image 32a showing the first round. This character image 26w is an image to be displayed only when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is applied (fact). Above, it is an effect that definitely suggests the set value "1"). In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "2", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "2" is not hit. , (C-2), in the first round of the winning game, the character image 26w and the character image 26x are displayed on the image display device 26 together with the round display image 32a showing the first round. The character image 26w and the character image 26x are setting suggestions suggesting a setting value "1" or a setting value "2" when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "2". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "3" is not hit. , (C-3), in the first round of the winning game, the character image 26w and the character image 26y are displayed on the image display device 26 together with the round display image 32a showing the first round. The character image 26w and the character image 26y are setting suggestions suggesting a set value "1" or a set value "3" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "2" or the set value "4" is not hit. , (C-4), in the first round of the winning game, the character image 26x and the character image 26z are displayed on the image display device 26 together with the round display image 32a showing the first round. The character image 26x and the character image 26z are setting suggestions suggesting the set value "2" or the set value "4" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. As described in the description of the flowchart of FIGS. 35 to 37, the establishment of the first condition refers to the table shown in FIG. 21 (A), so that the setting suggestion effect is always executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the motivation to play a game at the time of opening the game store, and it is possible to improve the operation at the time of opening the store. In determining whether the hit is within 30 minutes from the opening of the store, refer to the time measured by the RTC (real-time clock) device 204 described above and determine whether the hit is within 30 minutes from the opening of the store. Just judge.

Next, FIG. 39 corresponds to the establishment of the second condition and the establishment of the seventh condition described in the description of the flowchart of FIGS. 35 to 37. That is, FIG. 39 shows that the round game of the winning game is in progress, and the large winning opening 24 is open. (A) shows a screen during a normal round game (where the setting suggestion effect is not performed), and in the screen during the normal round game, as an example, a round display image 32a showing the third round and A hit symbol image 32b indicating that the combination of symbols "777" was a hit, and a character image ChaF for liveliness are displayed. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is that the second condition is satisfied or the seventh condition is satisfied and the result is a win, the screen during the round game shown in (B-1) to (B-4) is displayed. Is displayed. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is applied, as shown in (B-1), ( In addition to the image shown in A), the character image 26w is displayed. This character image 26w is an image to be displayed only when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is applied (fact). Above, it is an effect that definitely suggests the set value "1"). In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "2", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "2" is not hit. , (B-2), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26w and the character image 26x are displayed. The character image 26w and the character image 26x are setting suggestions suggesting a setting value "1" or a setting value "2" when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "2". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "3" is not hit. , (B-3), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26w and the character image 26y are displayed. The character image 26w and the character image 26y are setting suggestions suggesting a set value "1" or a set value "3" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "2" or the set value "4" is not hit. , (B-4), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26x and the character image 26z are displayed. The character image 26x and the character image 26z are setting suggestions suggesting the set value "2" or the set value "4" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. As a result, as described above, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the round during the hit game in which the effect is merely developed.

Next, FIG. 40 corresponds to the establishment of the third condition, the establishment of the eighth condition, and the establishment of the ninth condition described in the explanation of the flowchart of FIGS. 35 to 37. That is, in FIG. 40, the interval between rounds of the winning game is shown, and the big winning opening 24 is closed. (A) shows the screen during the normal inter-round interval (where the setting suggestion effect is not performed), and in the screen during the normal inter-round interval, as an example, the round display image 32a showing the first round. And next to it, an END image indicating that the first round has been completed is displayed. Further, a NEXT image showing the transition to the next round and a round display image 32f showing the second round as an example are displayed next to the NEXT image. In addition, a character image ChaF for liveliness is displayed. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is that the third condition is satisfied, the eighth condition is satisfied, or the ninth condition is satisfied, and the result is a win, then (B-1) to (B-4). The screen during the round game is displayed. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is applied, as shown in (B-1), ( In addition to the image shown in A), the character image 26w is displayed. This character image 26w is an image to be displayed only when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is applied (fact). Above, it is an effect that definitely suggests the set value "1"). In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "2", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "2" is not hit. , (B-2), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26w and the character image 26x are displayed. The character image 26w and the character image 26x are setting suggestions suggesting a setting value "1" or a setting value "2" when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "2". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "3" is not hit. , (B-3), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26w and the character image 26y are displayed. The character image 26w and the character image 26y are setting suggestions suggesting a set value "1" or a set value "3" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "2" or the set value "4" is not hit. , (B-4), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26x and the character image 26z are displayed. The character image 26x and the character image 26z are setting suggestions suggesting the set value "2" or the set value "4" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. As a result, as described above, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the setting suggestion effect may be performed at the interval between rounds during the hit game in which the effect is simply developed.

Next, FIG. 41 corresponds to the establishment of the fourth condition described in the description of the flowchart of FIGS. 35 to 37. That is, in FIG. 41, the ending of the winning game is shown, and the big winning opening 24 is closed. (A) shows a normal ending screen (where the setting suggestion effect is not performed), and a hit END image indicating that the hit game has ended and a character image ChaF for liveliness are displayed. There is. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is that the fourth condition is satisfied and the result is a win, the screens during the round game shown in (B-1) to (B-4) are displayed. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is applied, as shown in (B-1), ( In addition to the image shown in A), the character image 26w is displayed. This character image 26w is an image to be displayed only when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" is applied (fact). Above, it is an effect that definitely suggests the set value "1"). In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "2", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "2" is not hit. , (B-2), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26w and the character image 26x are displayed. The character image 26w and the character image 26x are setting suggestions suggesting a setting value "1" or a setting value "2" when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "2". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "3" is not hit. , (B-3), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26w and the character image 26y are displayed. The character image 26w and the character image 26y are setting suggestions suggesting a set value "1" or a set value "3" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or "3". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4", and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "2" or the set value "4" is not hit. , (B-4), in addition to the image shown in (A), the character image 26x and the character image 26z are displayed. The character image 26x and the character image 26z are setting suggestions suggesting the set value "2" or the set value "4" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2" or "4". It is an image to be displayed only when it hits the production. As a result, as described above, it is expected that the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the notification of the information related to the winning game and the ending of the winning game in which the effect is simply developed. Can be done. It should be noted that not only the fourth condition is satisfied, but also when the first condition, the fifth condition, and the sixth to ninth conditions are satisfied and the setting suggestion effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect may be executed by using the ending of the winning game.

Next, FIG. 42 corresponds to the establishment of the fifth condition described in the description of the flowchart of FIGS. 35 to 37. That is, in FIG. 42, (A) to (D) indicate that the winning game is in the round game, and the large winning opening 24 is open, and (E) indicates the ending of the winning game, and the large winning opening 24 is shown. Is closed. Further, FIG. 42 shows that the above-mentioned mini-game is being performed during the round game of the winning game. That is, in (A), as an example, a round display image 32a indicating that it is a fifth round round game, a cross key button image 32c, and a quiz image 32d indicating a XX problem are displayed. Then, the player selects an answer by using the left and right buttons of the cross key button 16, and in the example of (A), it indicates that the left button is pressed. Similarly, (B) indicates that the second question is given in the sixth round, and (C) indicates that the third question is given in the seventh round. Then, in (D), in the 9th round, an image showing that all the questions were answered correctly in the quizzes given in the 5th to 7th rounds is displayed, and in (E), the quizzes given in the 5th to 7th rounds are displayed. As a privilege for answering all the questions correctly, in addition to the normal ending screen described in FIG. 41, the character image 26w is displayed (when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1"). So, it does not correspond to the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value "1"). This makes it possible to actively try to play a mini game as described above.

Next, FIG. 43 corresponds to the establishment of the sixth condition described in the description of the flowchart of FIGS. 35 to 37. That is, FIG. 43 shows that the round game of the winning game is in progress, and the large winning opening 24 is open. (A-1) to (A-3) indicate the case where the total number of balls to be acquired has not reached 5,000, and (B-1) to (B-3) indicate the case where the total number of balls to be acquired has not reached 5,000. It shows the case of winning the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect performed by reaching the number of shots and reaching 5000 shots. In (A-1), the total acquired ball output image 32e (950 as an example) showing the total acquired ball output is displayed, and in (A-2), the total acquired ball output image 32e showing the total acquired ball output. (1000 as an example) is displayed, and in (A-3), a total acquired ball output image 32e (1200 as an example) showing the total acquired ball output is displayed. On the other hand, in (B-1), the total earned ball output image 32e (4950 as an example) showing the total earned ball output is displayed, and in (B-2), the total earned ball output showing the total earned ball output. The ball image 32e (5000 as an example) is displayed, and the "5000 shots OVER!" Image indicating that 5000 shots have been obtained is displayed. In (B-3), the total number of balls obtained is displayed. The total acquired ball output image 32e (5200 as an example) is displayed, and the character image 26w and the character image 26x are displayed (the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1" or When it is "2", it does not correspond to the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value "1" or the set value "2"). As a result, as described above, in addition to the satisfaction of being able to win a large number of prize balls in succession, it is possible to give an expectation that a setting suggestion effect may be performed. The character images 26w, 26x, 26y, and 26z are effects that exclusively suggest the set values, and do not give any other suggestions (for example, shifting to the probabilistic game state after the end of the winning game).

In the above-mentioned example, an example in which the processing related to the setting suggestion effect is performed by the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 has been described, but the setting suggestion effect is performed by controlling the payout control board 300 as follows. You can also. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a setting suggestion effect execution process performed in the interrupt process executed by periodically interrupting the main process (not shown) of the payout control board 300, and FIG. 45 is a setting suggestion effect. This is an animation showing an example.

(Step S401)
In step S401, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the ball lending button 12 is pressed 10 times. Here, the payout RAM 303 is provided with a press count counter that counts the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed, and the payout CPU 301 is input with the press information of the ball lending button 12 and pays out for ball lending. Every time, the value of the press count counter is added by 1. Then, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed is 10 times by referring to the value of the number of times pressed counter. That is, the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed 10 times corresponds to the case where the ball lending is paid out 10 times. The state when the ball lending button 12 is pressed 10 times may be any of "non-variable short-term", "variable short-term medium", and "winning game" in the above-mentioned example, but "variable". Since the player possesses many game balls in "short and medium" and "winning game", it is not expected that the ball lending button 12 is pressed. Therefore, it is assumed that this is an event that can occur during "non-variable short-term". Then, when the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed is 10, the process shifts to step S402, and when the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed is less than 10 times or 11 times or more, step S406 Move the process to.

(Step S402)
In step S402, the payout CPU 301 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B from the payout ROM 302 and sets it in, for example, a register. When the payout CPU 301 performs the setting suggestion effect, it is preferable to store the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21B in the payout ROM 302 in advance. Then, it is not necessary to exchange data with the main control board 100 every time the setting suggestion effect is performed. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S403.

(Step S403)
In step S403, the payout CPU 301 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S402. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process shifts to step S404.

(Step S404)
In step S404, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect has been achieved as a result of performing the lottery in step S403. Then, if it wins, the process shifts to step S405, and if it does not win, the setting suggestion effect execution process is completed, and the main process (not shown) of the payout control board 300 is interrupted and executed periodically. Move to another process in the interrupt process to be performed.

(Step S405)
In step S405, the payout CPU 301 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. When the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the setting suggestion effect is performed using the notification device that can be controlled by the payout control board 300. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the setting suggestion effect execution process is completed, and the interrupt process is executed by periodically interrupting the main process (not shown) of the payout control board 300. Move to other processing in.

(Step S406)
In step S406, the payout CPU 301 refers to the value of the press count counter and determines whether or not the ball lending button 12 is pressed 20 times. Then, when the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed is 20, the process shifts to step S407, and when the number of times the ball lending button 12 is pressed is not 20, the setting suggestion effect execution process is completed and the payout control is performed. The process shifts to another process in the interrupt process that is executed by interrupting the main process (not shown) of the substrate 300 on a regular basis.

(Step S407)
In step S407, the payout CPU 301 reads out the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table described with reference to FIG. 21A from the payout ROM 302 and sets it in, for example, a register. Then, when the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table is read, the process shifts to step S408.

(Step S408)
In step S408, the payout CPU 301 extracts a predetermined random number and then performs a lottery process using the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table read out in step S407. Then, when the lottery process is completed, the process shifts to step S409.

(Step S409)
In step S409, the payout CPU 301 sets the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery in the output port. Then, when the setting suggestion effect determined by the lottery is set in the output port, the setting suggestion effect execution process is completed, and the interrupt process is executed by periodically interrupting the main process (not shown) of the payout control board 300. Move to other processing in.

By such processing, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 45 can be executed. In FIG. 45, (A) shows a normal display mode of the balance display unit 12a, and (B) shows a specific display mode of the balance display unit 12a. That is, in each case, as an example, the balance display unit 12a indicates that the balance of the valuable value medium is "50", and in (A), it is a normal display mode, for example, a red display. Is displayed as "50". On the other hand, in (B), a specific display mode, for example, "50" is displayed in a green display, suggesting a set value "1" or a set value "2" as an example. It should be noted that the setting value "1" or the setting value "2" suggestion, the setting value "1" suggestion, the setting value "1" or the setting value by lighting red, blinking red, lighting green, blinking green, etc. The suggestion of "3" and the suggestion of the set value "2" or the set value "4" may be made. Further, (C) shows a normal display mode of the ball lending lamp 12b, and (D) shows a specific display mode of the ball lending lamp 12b. That is, in each case, while notifying that the ball can be lent, in (C), it is lit in a normal display mode, for example, a red display. On the other hand, in (D), it is lit in a specific display mode, for example, a green display, suggesting a set value "1" or a set value "2" as an example. It should be noted that the setting value "1" or the setting value "2" suggestion, the setting value "1" suggestion, the setting value "1" or the setting value by lighting red, blinking red, lighting green, blinking green, etc. The suggestion of "3" and the suggestion of the set value "2" or the set value "4" may be made.

In this way, by managing by the payout control board 300, it is possible to perform the setting suggestion effect without particularly requiring a command from the main control board 100. Further, the setting suggestion effect can be performed without using each effect device of the effect control board 200. If the ball lending button 12 is pressed 10 times or 20 times, there is a possibility that the player has not obtained a large number of balls for a long period of time, so that the player feels a loss. May also be growing. By giving the possibility that the setting suggestion effect is performed under such a situation, the feeling of loss can be alleviated. Further, as in the above-mentioned example, when the number of times increases, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery table without loss described with reference to FIG. 21 (A) is used, so that the setting suggestion effect is always executed, resulting in a large loss. It can relieve the feelings of the player who is getting the feeling.

As described above, according to the first embodiment, in the "non-variable short and medium" (for example, FIGS. 22 to 24), each of the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. When the conditions (for example, the first condition to the eleventh condition) are satisfied, a lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, the setting suggestion effect is executed using the image display device 26 (for example, FIG. 25). In addition, in "in the middle of variation" (for example, FIGS. 30 to 32), each condition (for example, the first condition-) for executing the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is drawn. When the ninth condition) is satisfied, a lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, the setting suggestion effect is executed using the image display device 26 (for example, FIG. 33). In addition, in "during a hit game" (for example, FIGS. 35 to 37), each condition (for example, the first condition- When the ninth condition) is satisfied, a lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, the setting suggestion effect is executed using the image display device 26 (for example, FIG. 39). As a result, in each of "non-variable short-term medium", "variable short-term medium", and "hit game in progress", the fun of guessing the set value by executing the setting suggestion effect is added, so that the motivation for playing can be further improved. can.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the second embodiment, only the points different from the first embodiment described above will be described, and the description of the common parts will be omitted. Therefore, for example, the setting suggestion effect described in the first embodiment may be applied in the second embodiment, of course. In addition, it goes without saying that the contents described in the third embodiment described later may be applied in the second embodiment.

First, FIG. 46 shows the second embodiment ver. Of the special symbol collision detection table (see FIG. 5). FIG. 47 shows the second embodiment ver. Of the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 6). Is. In FIG. 46, unlike FIG. 5, an upper limit is set for the number of probabilistic game states (hereinafter, also referred to as “ST number”), and if this is the set value “1” of (A-1), it is “28”. The number of times is "29" when the set value "2" of (A-2) is set, and "30" times when the set value "3" of (A-3) is set. If the set value of (A-4) is "4", the number of times is "31". In this way, the setting value "1" that is advantageous to the player has the least number of STs, and the setting value "4" that is disadvantageous to the player has the largest number of STs. This is a consideration for not having a different ST continuation rate for each value, and the ST continuation rate is "63.8%" for all set values. The "ST continuation rate" means the probability of winning the next time when entering the probabilistic gaming state. For example, the expected value per continuous average when entering the probabilistic gaming state is common to all set values. , "2.77" times. Further, unlike FIG. 6 of the first embodiment, the ST rush rate (rush rate to the probabilistic game state) is "100%" for all settings, and the number of variations is also "100" for all settings. "It has become. On the other hand, the number of times of the time saving game state is "72" when the set value "1" of (A-1) is set, and "71" when the set value "2" of (A-2) is set. The number of times is "70" when the set value of (A-3) is "3", and "69" when the set value of (A-4) is "4". There is. That is, the set value "1" is the number of STs "28" + the number of time-saving game states "72" = the number of variations "100", and the set value "2" is the number of STs "29" + time-saving. The number of game states "71" = the number of variations "100", and the set value "3" is the number of STs "30" + the number of time-saving game states "70" = the number of variations "100". , The set value "4" is the number of STs "31" + the number of time-saving game states "69" = the number of variations "100". Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the above-mentioned number of STs is set for each special symbol (so as to correspond to the special symbol). For example, in the special symbol A having the set value "1" (1-1), the number of ST times "28" is set, and although the illustration is omitted, the number of time-saving game states "72" is also set. ing. Similarly, for example, in the special symbol A having the set value "4" (4-1), the number of ST times is "31", and although not shown, the number of time-saving game states is "69". Is also defined. Further, also in the special symbol D of (1-2) set value "1", the number of ST times "28" is set, and although the illustration is omitted, the number of time-saving game states "72" is also set. ing. Similarly, for example, in the special symbol D of (4-2) set value "4", the number of ST times is "31", and although not shown, the number of time-saving game states is "69". Is also defined. Further, in both the set value "1" and the set value "4", "7" is displayed as the display mode of the special symbol display (first special symbol display 27a), and the special symbol D is displayed. Is displayed as a display mode of the special symbol display (second special symbol display 27b). In this way, even if the number of STs differs for each set value, for example, in the case of special symbol A, "7" is displayed as the display mode of the special symbol display (first special symbol display 27a), and the special symbol is displayed. If it is D, "7." is displayed as the display mode of the special symbol display (second special symbol display 27b). Therefore, the number of STs and the set value are different from the display mode of the special symbol display. It can be difficult to figure out if there is one. Of course, the special symbol may be different for each set value. For example, the set value "4" may include a "special symbol I" corresponding to the "special symbol A" of the set value "1", and the "special symbol A" may be provided. Further, as shown in (5-1), (5-2), (6-1), and (6-2) of FIG. 47, the ST inrush rate does not have to be 100%. In this case, the game state after the hit is provided with a "normal hit" that shifts to the time-saving game state, and in the "normal hit", the ST number is not given, but the time-saving game state number is given as "100" times. It is configured as follows. Then, even when the time-saving game state of "100" times after this "normal hit" is being executed, the effect shown in FIG. 52 may be executed. In this way, in addition to the fun of guessing how many STs are, the fun of guessing whether or not ST is given in the first place (ST or just a time-saving game state). It is possible to add fun such as (whether or not).

Here, if the number of STs is common to all the set values, for example, the set value "1" is more likely to be determined to be a hit than the set value "4", and the ST continuation rate is higher. The ST continuation rate will be different. In this way, if the ST continuation rate is different for each set value, it is advantageous for the player to have a higher set value in both the normal game state and the probabilistic game state, and it cannot be expected that a high set value is set. In amusement stores, there is a risk of slowing down operations. Therefore, it is conceivable to make the ST number of times different for each set value (the higher the set value, the smaller the number of STs, and the lower the set value, the larger the number of STs) so that the ST continuation rate is common to all the set values. However, if the ST continuation rate is common to all the set values, a new problem is that the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely grasped by the player from the number of STs different for each set value. Can occur. That is, in the conventional ST type gaming machine, for example, the remaining number of STs is notified by using a liquid crystal display device or the like for every 10 fluctuations during ST, so that the player can increase the number of STs. I could easily grasp how many times it was. However, as described above, assuming that the ST continuation rate is shared by all the set values, the number of STs differs for each set value. Therefore, if this is notified during ST as in the conventional case, the set value will be rounded. It will be understood. The second embodiment is an invention made for a problem that may occur when such a probabilistic gaming state is set to ST type and the ST continuation rate is standardized for all set values. The details will be described below.

First, a process different from that of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 shows the second embodiment ver. Of the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 13). FIG. 49 shows the second embodiment ver. Of the winning game process (see FIG. 14). Is. Further, in FIGS. 48 and 49, a process different from the process of the first embodiment and a process connected to the portion are described, and the description of some processes is omitted. Hereinafter, only the processing different from the processing of the first embodiment will be described.

(Step S103-4-14)
In step S103-4-14, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of STs is set. Here, in steps S103-5-26 in FIG. 49, which will be described later, the main CPU 101 sets the ST number of times according to the set value in the ST number of times counter provided in the main RAM 103, and in the process. Refers to the value of the ST count counter provided in the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the ST count is set. Then, when the ST number is set, the process shifts to step S103-4-15, and when the ST number is not set, the process shifts to step S103-4-4.

(Step S103-4-15)
In steps S103-4-15, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the ST count counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, when the value of the ST count counter provided in the main RAM 103 is subtracted by 1, the process shifts to step S103-4-16.

(Step S103-4-16)
In step S103-4-16, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the ST count counter provided in the main RAM 103 in step S103-4-15, and as a result, whether or not the number of STs after the subtraction is "0". Is determined. Then, when the number of STs after subtraction is "0", the process shifts to step S103-4-17, and when the number of STs after subtraction is not "0", the process during special symbol change is terminated. The process shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S103-4-17)
In steps S103-4-17, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, in the process, "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when "1" is set in the game state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process shifts to step S103-4-18.

(Step S103-4-18)
In steps S103-4-18, the main CPU 101 is set in the command transmission area described above in order to transmit a game state command indicating that the game is in the time saving game state to the effect control board 200. Then, when a game state command indicating that the time-saving game state is set is set, the process shifts to step S103-4-19.

(Step S103-4-19)
In step S103-4-19, the main CPU 101 reads out the set value stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11 of FIG. Then, when the set value stored in the main RAM 103 is read, the process shifts to step S103-4-20.

(Step S103-4-20)
In step S103-4-20, the main CPU 101 sets the number of time-saving game states according to the set value read in step S103-4-19. For example, if the set value read in step S103-4-19 is "1", "72" times are set as the time saving game state counts in the time saving number counter provided in the main RAM 103, and the set value is "2". If, "71" times are set in the time saving game state counter provided in the main RAM 103, and if the set value is "3", "70" times are set as the time saving game state times. It is set in the time reduction counter provided in the main RAM 103, and if the set value is "4", "69" times is set in the time reduction counter provided in the main RAM 103 as the number of time reduction game states. Then, when the number of time-saving game states is set according to the set value, the processing during the special symbol change is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

Next, since step S103-5-23 in FIG. 49 is the same as step S103-5-18 described above, the description thereof is omitted, and step S103-5-24 is the same as step S103-5-19 described above. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, when the process of step S103-5-24 is completed, the process shifts to step S103-5-25.

(Step S103-5-25)
In step S103-5-25, the main CPU 101 reads out the set value stored in the main RAM 103 in step S11 of FIG. Then, when the set value stored in the main RAM 103 is read, the process shifts to step S103-5-26.

(Step S103-5-26)
In step S103-5-26, the main CPU 101 sets the number of STs according to the set value read in step S103-5-25. For example, if the set value read in step S103-5-25 is "1", "28" times are set as the number of STs in the probability variation counter provided in the main RAM 103, and the set value is "2". If there is, "29" times are set in the probability variation counter provided in the main RAM 103 as the number of STs, and if the set value is "3", "30" times are provided in the main RAM 103 as the number of STs. It is set in the probability variation counter, and if the set value is "4", "31" is set as the ST count in the probability variation counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, when the number of STs corresponding to the set value is set, the winning game process is ended, and the process shifts to step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

By such a process, it is possible to set a different number of ST times for each set value and a different set of the number of time-saving game states for each set value in the second embodiment. Next, FIGS. 50 and 51 describe a method for solving the above-mentioned problem that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely grasped by the player from the number of STs different for each set value. This will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 52 and the animation of FIGS. 52 to 55.

(Explanation using the time chart of FIG. 50 and the animation of FIG. 52)
FIG. 50 shows a “high probability state (number of times)”, a “variable short-term state (number of times)”, and a “common effect (number of times)” for each set value, and (a) indicates the end of winning. ing. As described with reference to FIG. 46, since the ST rush rate is "100%", the "high probability state (number of times)", "variable short state (number of times)", and "variation" are performed at the same time as the end of hitting (a). All of "Short and medium common production (number of times)" are ON. (A) In the case of the set value "1", as shown in (b), when the "design variation game" is performed "28" times in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" is turned off. .. Further, as shown in (f), both the "variable short state" and the "variable short and medium common effect" are turned off when the "design variation game" is performed "100" times. (B) In the case of the set value "2", as shown in (c), when the "design variation game" is performed "29" times in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" is turned off. .. Further, as shown in (f), both the "variable short state" and the "variable short and medium common effect" are turned off when the "design variation game" is performed "100" times. (C) In the case of the set value "3", as shown in (d), when the "design variation game" is performed "30" times in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" is turned off. .. Further, as shown in (f), both the "variable short state" and the "variable short and medium common effect" are turned off when the "design variation game" is performed "100" times. (D) In the case of the set value "4", as shown in (e), when the "design variation game" is performed "31" times in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" is turned off. .. Further, as shown in (f), both the "variable short state" and the "variable short and medium common effect" are turned off when the "design variation game" is performed "100" times.

FIG. 52 shows the “common effect during variation and shortness” in FIG. 50. In FIG. 52, (A-1) to (A-5) show, as an example, the notification mode of the image display device 26 from the end of the winning game to the rotation of "100" when the set value is "1". There is. On the other hand, (B-1) to (B-5) show, as an example, the notification mode of the image display device 26 from the end of the winning game to the rotation of "100" when the set value is "4". (A-1) and (B-1) show the ending screen of the winning game, and (A-2) and (B-2) show the first rotation. In this first rotation, in the time chart of FIG. 50, all of the "high probability state", the "variable short state", and the "variable short and medium common effect" are turned on. That is, in the first rotation, the character image ChaF and the character image ChaG as shown in (A-2) and (B-2) are displayed, and the outer space image is displayed as the background image. Further, in the variable / short state remaining number notification image 32g for notifying the remaining number of "variable short state", "remaining 99 times" is displayed. Here, an image indicating that the player has entered the ST, such as "ST rush!", May be displayed. Then, (A-3) indicates the "28" rotation, and (B-3) indicates the "31" rotation, and both the set value "1" and the set value "4" are still set. This is a state in which the "high probability state", the "variable short state", and the "variable short and medium common effect" are ON. In (A-3) and (B-3), the character image ChaF and the character image ChaG are displayed as in the first rotation, and the outer space image is displayed as the background image. Further, in the variation state remaining number of times notification image 32g, "remaining 72 times" is displayed in (A-3) and "remaining 69 times" is displayed in (B-3). Then, (A-4) indicates the "29" rotation, and (B-4) indicates the "32" rotation, and both the set value "1" and the set value "4" are ". The "high probability state" is OFF. That is, the boundary between (A-3) and (A-4) and between (B-3) and (B-4) is the boundary between the high-probability state and the low-probability state. Here, also in (A-4) and (B-4), the character image ChaF and the character image ChaG, which are continuously displayed from the first rotation, and the outer space image are displayed as the background image. ing. Further, in the variation state remaining number of times notification image 32g, "remaining 71 times" is displayed in (A-4) and "remaining 68 times" is displayed in (B-4). Further, even at the "100" rotation indicated by (A-5) and (B-5), the display of the character image ChaF and the character image ChaG, which are continuously displayed from the first rotation, and as a background image, An outer space image is displayed. Further, in the variation state remaining number notification image 32g for notifying the remaining number of times of the "variation state", "remaining 0 times" is displayed. That is, from the first rotation to the 100th rotation after the end of the winning game, the image displayed on the image display device 26 uses a common image except for the 32g of the variation state remaining number notification image, and in particular, the high probability state. Since a common image is consistently displayed even at the boundary between the high probability state and the low probability state, the boundary between the high probability state and the low probability state cannot be grasped from the notification mode of the image display device 26. It has become. In addition, neither in the case of the set value "1" nor in the case of the set value "4", the notification effect that the high probability state has ended when the upper limit number of times of the high probability state is reached is not performed, and the notification effect is low. The notification effect that the probability state (time reduction game state) has been started is not performed, and the "variation / short / medium common effect" related to the "variation / shortening state" is executed. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, regardless of whether the set value is "1" or the set value is "4", the number of STs differs for each set value from the notification mode of the image display device 26. It is possible to solve the problem that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely grasped by the player from the above-mentioned number of STs different for each set value. can. Further, the image display device 26 does not display the remaining number of times (ST number of times) in the "high probability state", but displays the remaining number of times in the "variable short state". As a result, the number of times of the "variable state" can be grasped, but the remaining number of times of the "high probability state" (ST number) is not notified, so that it is possible to grasp when the "high probability state" has ended. It cannot be done, and it can be difficult to grasp the set value.

In the example of FIG. 52, the "common effect during variation and shortness" is the same effect from the first rotation to the 100th rotation, but the "common effect during variation and shortness" depends on the number of rotations. The content may change. For example, from the 1st rotation to the 50th rotation, the "common effect 1 during the variation" is executed, and from the 51st rotation to the 70th rotation, the "common effect 2 during the variation" is executed, and from the 71st rotation. You may execute "common effect 3 during variation short" up to the 100th rotation. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored due to changes in the production.

(Explanation using the time chart of FIG. 51 and the animation of FIG. 53)
FIG. 51 is another example of FIG. 50, and the number of times of the high probability state is the same as that of FIG. (The time-saving game state is not reached after the end), and the effect of concealment effect is executed from "28" rotation of (b) to 31 rotations of (c). That is, from the end of hitting (a), the high probability state and the variable / short state are turned on, and the concealment effect remains OFF. Then, when the 28th rotation "design variation game" of (b) is completed, the variation state is turned off and the concealment effect is turned on for all the set values. The high probability state is turned off at the same number of times as in FIG. 50. Further, when the "design variation game" of the 31st rotation of (c) is completed, the concealment effect is turned off for all the set values.

FIG. 53 represents the “confidential effect” in FIG. 51. In FIG. 53, (A-1) to (A-4) are, as an example, a notification mode (concealment effect) of the image display device 26 from the rotation of "28" to the rotation of "31" when the set value is "1". ) Is shown. On the other hand, (B-1) to (B-4), as an example, show the notification mode (concealment effect) of the image display device 26 from the rotation of "28" to the rotation of "31" when the set value is "4". Shown. In (A-1) and (B-1), the "28" rotation is shown, and in this "28" rotation, both (A-1) and (B-1) are in a high probability state. .. However, in the image display device 26, a background image of "○○ mode" is displayed, and indefinite notification such as "is it highly accurate?" Is performed. Although the display modes of the "1" rotation to the "27" rotation are omitted, an image that deterministically notifies that the state is in a high probability state is displayed. By switching to the concealment effect, the player cannot grasp whether the high probability state continues or the normal game state is reached after the high probability state is terminated. Then, in (A-2) and (B-2), the "29" rotation is indicated, and in this "29" rotation, the set value "4" continues to be in a high probability state, but is set. The value "1" has shifted to the low probability state. However, in the image display device 26, a background image of "○○ mode" is continuously displayed, and indefinite notification such as "is it highly accurate?" Is performed. That is, when the set value is "1", the probability state is internally lower than that of the "29" rotation, but the image display device 26 notifies that the image display device 26 has shifted to the low probability state, for example, the low probability state. The corresponding background image is not displayed, and the concealment effect is performed at least up to the "31" rotation, which is the upper limit of the high probability state of the set value "4". Hereinafter, the set value "4" is also high for the "30" rotation indicated by (A-3) and (B-3) and the "31" rotation indicated by (A-4) and (B-4). Although the probability state continues, the set value "1" has shifted to the low probability state, and the image display device 26 continuously displays the background image "○○ mode", and further, "○○ mode" is displayed. Indefinite notifications such as "Is it highly accurate?" That is, even at the boundary between the high-probability state and the low-probability state, the common concealment effect is consistently performed between the "28" rotation and the "31" rotation, so that the high-probability state and the low-probability state The boundary between the two can not be grasped from the notification mode of the image display device 26. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 53, even if the set value is "1" or the set value is "4", it cannot be grasped from the notification mode of the image display device 26. It is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely grasped by the player from the number of STs different for each set value.

In addition, in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, it can be configured as follows. That is, in FIG. 52, as shown in FIG. 54, if the "setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition" occurs between the end of the winning game and the "100" rotation, a lottery is performed, and if the game is won, the lottery is performed. Even if the ending screen as shown in (A-4) and (B-4) is displayed after the end of the "100th" rotation in the time-saving game state and the setting suggestion effect is executed on the ending screen. good. The "setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition" referred to here may be the condition during the variation in the first embodiment. That is, in the non-winning cases shown in (A-1) to (A-4), only the character image ChaG is displayed as shown in the ending (A-4), but (B-1) to (B-1) to ( In the winning case shown in B-4), as shown in (B-4) of the ending, by displaying the character image ChaF in addition to the character image ChaG, as an example, the set value "1" or is set. A setting suggestion effect suggesting that the value is "3" can be executed. Further, in FIG. 53, as shown in FIG. 55, if a "setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition" occurs between the end of the winning game and the "27" rotation, a lottery is performed, and if the winning game is won, After the end of the concealment effect, an ending screen as shown in (A-5) and (B-5) may be displayed, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the ending screen. The "setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition" referred to here may be the condition during the variation in the first embodiment. That is, in the non-winning cases shown in (A-1) to (A-5), only the character image ChaG is displayed as shown in the ending (A-5), but (B-1) to (B-1) to ( In the winning case shown in B-5), as shown in (B-5) of the ending, by displaying the character image ChaF in addition to the character image ChaG, as an example, the set value "1" or is set. A setting suggestion effect suggesting that the value is "3" can be executed.

When the probability variation game state is ST type as in the second embodiment, it is more effective to use the following "setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition". In other words, in the "special symbol hit detection process", if it is determined to be a hit and the player rushes into the ST after the hit game ends, but never wins in the ST and runs through, the "setting suggestion effect execution lottery condition" May be established. In this case, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player when the ST ends without hitting even though he has made a lot of effort to enter the ST.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, for example, in the set value "1", the hit probability in the "normal game state" and the "time saving game state" is "1/280", and the hit probability in the "probability variation game state". Is "1/28", for example, at the set value "4", the hit probability in the "normal game state" and the "time saving game state" is "1/310", and the hit probability in the "probability variation game state" is "1/310". It was set to "1/31". Further, with such a hit probability, the set value "1" has a higher ST continuation rate than the set value "4", so the set value is set so that the ST continuation rate is common to all the set values. The number of STs of "1" was set to "28", and the number of STs of the set value "4" was set to "31" (FIG. 46). Further, if the number of STs is set as such, the set value is grasped by the player due to the difference in the number of STs. Therefore, for example, in the set value "1", the set value is not grasped due to the difference in the number of STs. Assuming that the number of STs is "28" + the number of time-saving game states is "72" (the total number of "variable state" is "100"), at the set value "4", the number of STs is "31" + time-saving game state. The number of times was set to "69" times (the total number of times in the "variable state" was "100" times). In addition, in a total of "100" times of "changing and shortening state", a common effect during changing and shortening is executed so as not to notify that the ST has ended or that the time saving game state has started (Fig.). 52). As a result, it is possible to give the player the feeling that a total of "100" times of "variable short-term state" have been given to the player, and in particular, when the ST has ended and when the short-time game state has been given. Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not it has started, even if the ST continuation rate is shared by all the set values, the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine will be grasped from the upper limit of the different STs. Such problems can be solved.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the third embodiment, only the points different from the above-described first embodiment will be described, and the description of the common parts will be omitted. Therefore, for example, the setting suggestion effect described in the first embodiment may be applied to the third embodiment as well. Further, in the third embodiment, although the setting suggestion effect is installed, the set value is grasped from the appearance when the power of the symbol is turned on, and the execution of the setting suggestion effect is wasted. It is an invention to prevent this.

First, a process different from that of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. 56 shows the third embodiment ver. Of the main control board main process (see FIG. 8). FIG. 57 is a set value information command reception time process (described only in the third embodiment) performed in the main command reception process in the effect control board timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). Further, in FIG. 56, a process different from the process of the first embodiment and a process connected to the portion are described, and the description of some processes is omitted. Hereinafter, only the processing different from the processing of the first embodiment will be described.

(Step S16)
In step S16, the main CPU 101 determines the initial roll on the special symbol display. That is, the main CPU 101 is not performed when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the set value change process is performed on the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b. Regardless of the case, the first symbol to be displayed (also called the initial result) is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), in the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b, a symbol (also referred to as an initial roll) that first displays "-" (horizontal bar symbol). To determine as. Then, when the initial result on the special symbol display is determined, the process shifts to step S17. In addition, "-" (horizontal bar symbol) is a loss that is definitely displayed on the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b when it is determined to be a loss in the "special symbol hit detection process". It is the same as the design. Therefore, the initial result on the special symbol display = the lost symbol that is confirmed and displayed on the special symbol display.

(Step S17)
In step S17, the main CPU 101 sets the data corresponding to the determined initial roll in the output port in order to display the determined initial roll on the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b. .. In the special symbol display control process of step S107 of FIG. 9, the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b were determined by using the data corresponding to the initial appearance set in the output port. The initial roll will be displayed. Then, when the data corresponding to the determined initial result is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S13.

(Processing when receiving setting value information command)
FIG. 57 is a process at the time of receiving the set value information command performed by the sub CPU 201. This process is performed when it is determined in step S301 of FIG. 16 that the set value information command has been received.

(Step S301-1)
In step S301-1, the sub CPU 201 stores the set value in the sub RAM 203. The processing performed here is the same as the content described in when the above-mentioned "setting value information command of FIG. 8" is received. Then, when the set value is stored in the sub RAM 203, the process shifts to step S301-2.

(Step S301-2)
In step S301-2, the sub CPU 201 determines the initial appearance of the decorative symbol image (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c) to be displayed on the image display device 26. That is, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 201 changes the set value in the decorative symbol image (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c) of the image display device 26. Regardless of whether the process is performed or not, the symbol to be displayed first (also referred to as the initial result) is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), in the image display device 26, "1" is set as the left decorative symbol image 26a, "2" is set as the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and "3" is set as the right decorative symbol image 26c. It is determined as the first symbol to be displayed (also called the initial result). Then, when the initial appearance of the decorative symbol image (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c) to be displayed on the image display device 26 is determined, the process proceeds to step S301-3. The combination "123" of each decorative symbol image is the same as a part of the lost symbol that is confirmed and displayed on the image display device 26 when it is determined to be lost in the "special symbol hit determination process". Therefore, the initial appearance (combination) of each decorative symbol image is a part of the lost symbol (combination) that is confirmed and displayed on the image display device 26.

(Step S301-3)
In step S301-3, the sub CPU 201 determines the initial appearance of the fourth symbol image 26d to be displayed on the image display device 26. That is, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 201 first performs the set value change process in the fourth symbol image 26d of the image display device 26 regardless of whether or not the set value change process is performed. Determine the design to be displayed on (also called the initial result). For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), in the image display device 26, the fourth symbol image 26d composed of "123" is determined as the first symbol to be displayed (also referred to as an initial result). Then, when the initial result of the fourth symbol image 26d to be displayed on the image display device 26 is determined, the process shifts to step S301-4. In addition, "123" of the fourth symbol image 26d is also a part of the lost symbol (combination) that is confirmed and displayed on the image display device 26, like the initial appearance (combination) of each decorative symbol image described above. ..

(Step S301-4)
In step S301-4, the sub CPU 201 determines the initial roll of the hold number image (first start port hold number image 26e, second start port hold number image 26f) to be displayed on the image display device 26. That is, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 201 changes the set value in the hold number image of the image display device 26 (first start port hold number image 26e, second start port hold number image 26f). Regardless of whether the processing is performed or not, the number of reserved images to be displayed first (also referred to as the initial result) is determined. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), in the image display device 26, "0" is first displayed as the first start port hold number image 26e, and "0" is first displayed as the second start port hold number image 26f. It is determined as a number image (also called an initial result). Then, when the initial result of the hold number image (first start port hold number image 26e, second start port hold number image 26f) to be displayed on the image display device 26 is determined, the process proceeds to step S301-5.

(Step S301-5)
In step S301-5, the sub CPU 201 sets the data corresponding to the determined initial roll in the output port in order to display the determined initial roll on the image display device 26. In the output control process for each effect device in step S304 of FIG. 16, the determined initial roll is displayed on the image display device 26 by using the data corresponding to the initial roll set in the output port. Become. For example, in the decorative symbol image (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c), the initial appearance shown in FIG. 58 (B) is displayed, and in the fourth symbol image 26d, the figure is shown. The initial roll shown in FIG. 58 (C) is displayed, and in the hold quantity image (first start port hold quantity image 26e, second start port hold quantity image 26f), the initial roll shown in FIG. 58 (D) is displayed. Will be done. Then, when the data corresponding to the determined initial result is set in the output port, the process shifts to step S301-6.

(Step S301-6)
In step S301-6, the sub CPU 201 determines the light emission pattern. Here, the sub CPU 201 is configured to determine the light emitting pattern in the light emitting device 9 and the panel lighting device 29. The light emitting pattern is such that the light emitting device 9 and the panel lighting device 29 emit light from the time when the power is turned on. The time until the start of is, for example, "light emission pattern 1" composed of "3S", "light emission pattern 2" composed of "4S", and "light emission pattern 3" composed of "5S". It has a plurality of light emission patterns such as, and, and determines one of the light emission patterns regardless of whether the set value is changed or not in the process. The light emitting device 9 and the panel lighting device 29 are configured to emit light according to the determined light emitting pattern. The pachinko gaming machine 1 whose set value has not been changed emits light after "3S" from the time when the power is turned on, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose set value has been changed emits light, for example, from the time when the power is turned on. Assuming that the light is emitted after "4S", two pachinko game machines 1 whose set value has not been changed and one pachinko game machine 1 whose set value has been changed are installed side by side. If it is installed on an island, there is a problem that only one machine has a different light emission pattern, and it becomes easy to grasp that it is the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose set value has been changed. With respect to such a problem, regardless of whether the set value is changed or not in the process, one of the light emitting patterns is determined, and the light emitting device is based on the determined light emitting pattern. By configuring the 9 and the board lighting device 29 to emit light, the time from when the power is turned on to when the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 start emitting light becomes random for each pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be difficult to identify the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose set value has been changed due to the difference in the light emission pattern. Then, when the light emission pattern is determined, the processing at the time of receiving the set value information command is terminated.

By such a process, the initial appearance of the image display device 26 in the third embodiment can be displayed. Next, the display of the initial result mentioned in the explanation of the above-mentioned flowchart will be described with reference to the animations of FIGS. 58 and 59. Note that FIG. 58 is a specification for displaying the initial roll dedicated to when the power is turned on regardless of the final roll on the previous day, and FIG. 59 is a specification in which the final roll on the previous day is stored and the initial roll when the power is turned on. It is a specification to be displayed as a roll.

FIG. 58 (A) shows the display mode of the initial appearance of the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b, and FIG. 58 (A-1) shows the case where the set value is changed. , (A-2) indicate the case where the set value is not changed. As described above, in the initial result, "-" (horizontal bar symbol) is displayed on both the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b, and further (A-1). , (A-2), "-" (horizontal bar symbol) is displayed. In this way, the initial outcomes of the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b are common regardless of whether the set value is changed or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the set value is changed from the display mode of the initial result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

FIG. 58 (B) shows the display mode of the initial appearance of the decorative symbol image (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c) of the image display device 26, and (B-1). ) Indicates that the set value has been changed, and (B-2) indicates that the set value has not been changed. As described above, in the initial appearance, the left decorative symbol image 26a is displayed as "1", the middle decorative symbol image 26b is displayed as "2", the right decorative symbol image 26c is displayed as "3", and (B). In either case of -1) or (B-2), the left decorative symbol image 26a is "1", the middle decorative symbol image 26b is "2", and the right decorative symbol image 26c is "3". It is displayed. In this way, regardless of whether the set value is changed or not, the decorative symbol image (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c) Since the initial rolls are common, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the set value has been changed from the display mode of the initial rolls. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

FIG. 58 (C) shows the display mode of the initial appearance of the fourth symbol image 26d of the image display device 26, and (C-1) shows the case where the set value is changed, and (C-2). ) Indicates the case where the set value is not changed. As described above, "123" is displayed as the initial result, and further, "123" is displayed in any of the cases (C-1) and (C-2). In this way, even if the set value is changed or the set value is not changed, the initial roll of the fourth symbol image 26d is common, so that the display mode of this initial roll is common. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the set value has been changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

FIG. 58 (D) shows a display mode of the initial appearance of the hold number image of the image display device 26 (first start port hold number image 26e, second start port hold number image 26f). ) Indicates that the set value has been changed, and (D-2) indicates that the set value has not been changed. As described above, "0" is displayed in both the first start port hold number image 26e and the second start port hold number image 26f in the initial result, and (D-1) and (D). In any case of -2), "0" is displayed. In this way, the initial rolls of the first start port hold number image 26e and the second start port hold number image 26f are common regardless of whether the set value is changed or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the set value is changed from the display mode of the initial appearance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

Next, a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 59. First, FIG. 59 (A) shows the display mode of the special symbol display, and FIG. 59 (A-1) shows the final roll of the previous day, that is, the game store reaches the closing time and the power is turned off. It represents the outcome of the event. That is, when the store is closed, the player is not playing the game and the lost symbol is displayed, so the final result on the previous day is "-" (horizontal bar symbol). Then, (A-2) shows the initial result when the set value is changed, and (A-3) shows the initial result when the set value is not changed. , (A-2) and (A-3), "-" (horizontal bar symbol), which is the same as the final roll on the previous day, is displayed as the initial roll. In this way, the initial outcomes of the first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b are common regardless of whether the set value is changed or not. Moreover, since it is common to the final roll of the previous day, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the set value is changed from the display mode of the initial roll and the difference from the final roll of the previous day. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

Next, FIG. 59 (B) shows a display mode of the decorative symbol image (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c) of the image display device 26, (B-1). Indicates the final roll of the previous day, that is, the roll when the game store reaches the closing time and the power is turned off. That is, when the store is closed, the player is not playing the game and the lost symbol is displayed. Therefore, the final result of the previous day is, for example, the left decorative symbol image 26a is "5" and the middle decorative symbol image 26b. Is "2", and the right decorative pattern image 26c is "6". Then, (B-2) shows the initial result when the set value is changed, and (B-3) shows the initial result when the set value is not changed. , (B-2) and (B-3) are the same as the final roll on the previous day, for example, the left decorative symbol image 26a is "5", the middle decorative symbol image 26b is "2", and the right decorative symbol is "2". Image 26c displays "6" as the initial roll. In this way, the decorative symbol image of the image display device 26 (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decoration) regardless of whether the set value is changed or not. Since the initial roll of the symbol image 26c) is common and also the same as the final roll of the previous day, whether or not the set value is changed due to the display mode of the initial roll and the difference from the final roll of the previous day. Can be difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

Next, FIG. 59 (C) shows the display mode of the fourth symbol image 26d of the image display device 26, and FIG. 59 (C-1) shows the final appearance of the previous day, that is, the amusement store reaches the closing time. It shows the result when the power is turned off. That is, when the store is closed, the player is not playing the game and the lost pattern is displayed, so that the final result on the previous day is, for example, "526". Then, (C-2) shows the initial result when the set value is changed, and (C-3) shows the initial result when the set value is not changed. , (C-2) and (C-3), the same as the final roll of the previous day, for example, "526" is displayed as the initial roll. In this way, regardless of whether the set value is changed or not, the initial appearance of the fourth symbol image 26d of the image display device 26 is common and the day before. Since it is common to the final roll of the above, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the set value is changed from the display mode of the initial roll and the difference from the final roll of the previous day. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

Next, FIG. 59 (D) shows a display mode of the hold number image of the image display device 26 (first start port hold number image 26e, second start port hold number image 26f), and (D-1). Indicates the final roll of the previous day, that is, the roll when the game store reaches the closing time and the power is turned off. That is, when the store is closed, the player is not playing a game and the number of holdings is "0", so the final roll on the previous day is "0". Then, (D-2) shows the initial result when the set value is changed, and (D-3) shows the initial result when the set value is not changed. , (D-2) and (D-3), "0", which is the same as the final roll on the previous day, is displayed as the initial roll. In this way, regardless of whether the set value is changed or the set value is not changed, the hold quantity image of the image display device 26 (first start port hold quantity image 26e, second start port hold). Since the initial roll of the number image 26f) is common and is also the same as the final roll of the previous day, whether or not the set value is changed due to the display mode of the initial roll and the difference from the final roll of the previous day. Can be difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first embodiment from being wasted.

As described above, according to the third embodiment, when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, if the set value is changed, the special symbol display (first special symbol display 27a, second special symbol display 27b) is used. , The initial roll "horizontal bar symbol" is displayed, and the initial roll "123" is displayed in the decorative symbol image (left decorative symbol image 26a, middle decorative symbol image 26b, right decorative symbol image 26c) of the image display device 26. Then, in the fourth symbol image 26d of the image display device 26, the initial result "123" is displayed, and the hold number image of the image display device 26 (first start port hold number image 26e, second start port hold number image 26f). ), The initial result "0" is displayed. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, even when the set value is not changed, the initial result is the same as when the set value is changed (FIG. 58). As a result, common predetermined identification information is displayed as the initial display mode when the power is turned on, regardless of whether the set value is changed (set) or not. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to detect whether or not the set value has been changed.

(Other possible technical ideas)
Hereinafter, other technical ideas relating to the above-described embodiment will be described. In the above-described embodiment, the adjustment of the amount of light and the adjustment of the volume using the cross key button 16 have been described, but when the setting suggestion effect is being executed, the amount of light is adjusted using the cross key button 16. Alternatively, the volume adjustment may be restricted (cannot be adjusted). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the level gauge image showing the degree of adjustment of the amount of light and the volume and the adjustment sound from not being noticed that the setting suggestion effect is being executed. In addition, when the setting suggestion effect is being executed, it is possible to adjust the amount of light and the volume using the cross key button 16, but a level gauge image showing the degree of volume adjustment and an adjustment sound are output. Even if you try not to do so, or by displaying the level gauge image small and outputting the adjustment sound at a low volume, you can prevent the setting suggestion effect from not being noticed. good. Further, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of normal gaming state modes that can be selected by the player by operating the effect button 14, and the mode can be switched while the fluctuation is stopped or during the fluctuation, the setting suggestion effect is executed. If so, the mode switching may be restricted (cannot be adjusted). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion effect from ending due to the mode switching even though the setting suggestion effect is being executed.

In the above-described embodiment, various error commands have been described, but if the above-mentioned various error commands are received while the setting suggestion effect is being executed, the notification corresponding to the received error commands may be performed. For example, when an error command indicating a radio wave abnormality is received, even if the character image for setting suggestion effect is being displayed, the image indicating the radio wave abnormality is superimposed on the character image or displayed separately from the character image. good. This allows the administrator to quickly detect that an error has occurred. Further, even for the above-mentioned minor error command, the notification corresponding to the received error command may be performed. For example, if the game ball is not pulled out from the lower saucer 5b even though the game ball is paid out in the winning game, an error command is received to notify the player to pull out the game ball from the lower saucer 5b. In this case, even if the character image for which the setting suggestion effect is displayed is being displayed, the message image "Please pull out the sphere" may be superimposed on the character image or displayed separately from the character image. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned various error commands are received while the setting suggestion effect is being executed, it is not necessary to perform the notification corresponding to the received error command, and the setting suggestion effect is performed after the setting suggestion effect is completed. However, for the above-mentioned minor error command, it is not necessary to perform the notification corresponding to the received error command.

In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that it is not possible to detect whether or not the set value has been changed depending on the display mode of the symbol when the power is turned on. The same idea can be applied when there is and when the set value is not changed. The "settings related to the output of various effects" are the adjustment of the amount of light and the adjustment of the volume using the cross key button 16. For example, when the amusement store is closed, the player's cross key button 16 is used. When the amount of light is set to "strong" and the volume is set to the maximum volume by the operation, when the store opens the next day (when the power is turned on), even if the set value is changed, the set value is not changed. Even in this case, the amount of light and the volume may be set according to the values set by the game machine side adjustment switch (not shown, but a switch that can be operated only by the game clerk) provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the value set by the gaming machine side adjustment switch (not shown) is "1", the amount of light may be set to "medium" and the volume may be set to an intermediate volume. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the presence or absence of changes in the set values from being detected from the "settings related to the output of various effects".

In the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed using the character image displayed on the image display device 26, but the setting suggestion effect is performed using the stage image (background image) displayed on the image display device 26. You may. For example, when performing a stage change between the standard "mountain stage", "sea stage", and "river stage", the transition is made only with the high set value (set value "1" or set value "2"). Stage (eg, "space stage") may be provided. As a result, the high set value (set value "1" or set value "2") is fixed by shifting to the "space stage", so that the player's attention can be attracted to the stage change. Further, the set values may be suggested in the order of stage change without providing another stage. For example, the standard transition order is to move from "mountain stage" to "sea stage", from "sea stage" to "river stage", and from "river stage" to "mountain stage". Only when it is a value (set value "1" or set value "2"), it shifts from "mountain stage" to "river stage", shifts from "river stage" to "sea stage", and "sea stage". There may be a transition from to the "mountain stage" (so-called breaking of the law). As a result, the high set value (set value "1" or set value "2") is determined from the breaking of the rule of stage change, so that the player's attention can be attracted to the stage change as well.

In addition, a special stage is provided that shifts only after the end of the winning game, the end of the time-saving game state, or the end of the probabilistic game state, and the set value is suggested by the number of stays (number of fluctuations) of this special stage. You may do so. For example, if you stay in the special stage for 40 rotations after the end of the winning game, it is suggested that the set value is "2" or the set value is "4", and you stay in the special stage for 50 rotations after the end of the winning game. If this is the case, it is suggested that the set value is "1" or the set value is "3", and if the player stays in the special stage for 60 rotations after the end of the winning game, the set value is "1" or the set value is "2". It may be suggested that As a result, it is possible to pay attention to how long the special stage continues after the end of the hit game, the end of the time-saving game state, or the end of the probabilistic game state, so that the game can be played after the end of the hit game or the like. It is possible to prevent the player from being quit immediately and improve the operation of the gaming machine.

Details of the means and the like described in the game machine of (1) above will be described.
A ball entry area (gate member 20, first start port 21, second start port 22, normal winning port 23, large winning port 24, out port 25) formed in a game area (game area 7) where a game ball can flow down. ) And the determination means (special symbol hit determination process) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (winning game) that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition (processing at the start of special symbol change). One of the set values (set value "1" to set value "4") of a plurality of stages in which the degree of advantage in the determination (probability of being determined to be a hit in the special symbol hit determination process) is different from that of the main CPU 101). Suggestion to execute the setting operation means (setting change device 31) for setting and the suggestion effect suggesting the set value set by the setting operation means (for example, the setting suggestion effect displayed on the image display device 26). The effect executing means (sub CPU 201) is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry area.

Next, details of the means and the like described in the game machine of (2) above will be described.
In the gaming machine of the above (1), identification information (first special symbol display 27a, special symbol of second special symbol display 27b, decorative symbol image of image display device 26, and first 4 Identification information display means (first special) that starts the fluctuation display of the symbol image 26d), stops the fluctuation display with the lapse of the fluctuation time (time specified in the fluctuation pattern), and derives the result of the determination. The symbol display 27a, the second special symbol display 27b, and the image display device 26) are further provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is said to be said during the execution of the variation display (at the time of the variation start, during the variation display, at the time of the variation stop). It is characterized in that it is possible to carry out suggestive effects.

Next, details of the means and the like described in the game machine of (3) above will be described.
In the gaming machine of the above (2), as the fluctuation time, the first fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern 13 to fluctuation pattern 17) in which the first fluctuation time is defined and the fluctuation time more than the first fluctuation time Any variation pattern from a plurality of variation patterns including a second variation pattern (for example, variation pattern 12) in which a short second variation time is defined, the first variation pattern, and the second variation pattern. The variation pattern determining means (main CPU 101 that performs the special symbol variation pattern determining process) and the suggestion effect executing means do not execute the suggestion effect when the second variation pattern is determined. It is characterized by that.

Next, details of the means and the like described in the game machine of (4) above will be described.
In any one of the above (1) to (3), the suggestion effect is exclusively set as in the golden full moon image 26S (for example, the effect of suggesting only the set value set by the setting operation means). It is characterized by the fact that it is a production that appears only for suggesting values.

Next, details of the means and the like described in the game machine of (5) above will be described.
In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (3) above, the suggestion effect suggests the possibility that the special gaming state is performed in addition to the suggestion of the set value set by the setting operation means. It is characterized in that it is an effect to be performed (for example, an effect that suggests a set value and also suggests the degree of expectation for a winning game, such as a notice of a movable body or a notice of a symbol action).

In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example, but the contents described in the present embodiment can also be applied to a rotating body type gaming machine (slot machine), and a ball game machine. It can also be applied to the arranged ball game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Outer frame 3 Middle frame 3a Frame open detection SW
4 Glass frame 5 Recipient member 5a Upper pan 5b Lower pan 6 Game board 7 Game area 8 Launch handle 9 Light emitting device 10 Speaker 11 Ball removal button 12 Ball lending button 12a Balance display 12b Ball lending lamp 13 Card return button 14 Production button 14a effect button detection SW
15 Directive lever 15a Directive lever detection SW
16 Cross key button 16a Cross key detection SW
17 Stage 18 Outer rail member 19 Inner rail member 20 Gate member 20a Gate detection SW
21 1st start port 21a 1st start port detection SW
22 2nd start port 22a 2nd start port detection SW
22b 2nd start opening opening / closing solenoid 23 Normal winning opening 23a Normal winning opening detection SW
24 Grand prize opening 24a Grand prize opening detection SW
24b Grand prize opening opening / closing solenoid 25 Out port 25a Out port detection SW
26 Image display device 26a Left decorative symbol image 26b Medium decorative symbol image 26c Right decorative symbol image 26d Fourth symbol image 26e First start port hold number image 26f Second start port hold number image 27 Symbol display device 27a First special symbol display Device 27b Second special symbol display 28 Movable body 29 Board lighting device 30 Board drive device 31 Setting change device 31a Setting change key hole 31b Setting change button 31c Setting confirmation button 31d Setting display unit 100 Main control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
200 Production control board 201 Sub CPU
202 sub ROM
203 sub RAM
204 RTC device 300 Payout control board 301 Payout CPU
302 payout ROM
303 Payout RAM
304 Dispensing device 305 Launching device 400 Power supply board

Claims (2)

An entry area formed in a game area where a game ball can flow down, and a ball entry area
A determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting area of the entry area.
A symbol variation game is executed in which the variation display of the identification information is started based on the game ball entering the start area, the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses, and the result of the determination is derived. Design fluctuation game execution means and
A setting operation means for setting one of the setting values from a plurality of stages of setting values having different degrees of advantage in the determination, and
A suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting information related to the set value set by the setting operation means, and a suggestion effect execution means.
With
In the special game state, the special entry area of the entry area is controlled to open and close over a plurality of round games, and when the open / close control over the plurality of round games is completed, the end state in the special game state is controlled.
The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state in which the special entry area is opened and closed for the first number of times as the plurality of round games, and a second number of times less than the first number of times as the plurality of round games. Including the second special gaming state that controls the opening and closing of the special entry area,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect based on the game ball entering the starting region, and the suggestion effect is performed when the symbol variation game based on the entry is being performed. Is feasible and
When the symbol variable game executed by said determination for shifting to the first special game state results are derived, prior SL goes to the first special game state, the suggested in the end state in the first special game state while Ru executable der specific suggestions director of the production,
When the result of the determination for shifting to the second special gaming state is derived by executing the symbol variation game, the game shifts to the second special gaming state, and the specific end state in the second special gaming state is specified. Suggestion production is not feasible,
The specific suggestion effect executed in the end state in the first special gaming state is set in the plurality of stages rather than the suggestion effect executed when the symbol variation game based on the ball entry is being performed. There is a high rate of suggesting information related to a specific set value, which is a set value of any one of the values.
A gaming machine characterized by that. An entry area formed in a game area where a game ball can flow down, and a ball entry area
A determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting area of the entry area.
A symbol variation game is executed in which the variation display of the identification information is started based on the game ball entering the start area, the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses, and the result of the determination is derived. Design fluctuation game execution means and
A setting operation means for setting one of the setting values from a plurality of stages of setting values having different degrees of advantage in the determination, and
A suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting information related to the set value set by the setting operation means, and a suggestion effect execution means.
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
With
The special game state is a first special game state in which the special ball entry area of the ball entry area is opened and closed for the first number of times as a plurality of round games, and the special game state is less than the first number of times as the plurality of round games. Including a second special gaming state in which the special entry area is opened and closed for a second number of times.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect based on the game ball entering the starting area, and the operation means when the symbol variation game based on the entry is being performed. It is possible to carry out the above-mentioned suggestion effect using
When the judgment result by the execution of the symbol variation game shifts to the first special game state is derived, Ru executable der the suggestion effect using the operation means in the migrated the first special game state On the other hand ,
When the result of the determination for shifting to the second special gaming state is derived by executing the symbol variation game, the suggestion effect using the operating means cannot be executed in the shifted second special gaming state. ,
Towards the suggestion effect said using said operation means to be performed than suggested directing with said operating means to be executed in the first special game state when the symbol variation game based on the entering-sphere is being performed Is a setting value of any one of the plurality of stages of setting values.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images